PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ......

223
SPEC PAGE 1 THURROCK COUNCIL PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) The Specification referred to in the Tender shall be the 'Specification for Highway Works', published by HMSO as Volume 1 of the Manual of Contract Documents for Highway Works, as modified and extended by the following: (i) Appendix 0/1: Contract-specific Additional, Substitute and Cancelled Clauses, Tables and Figures; (ii) Appendix 0/2: Contract-specific minor alterations to existing Clauses, Tables and Figures; (iii) The Numbered Appendices listed in Appendix 0/3; (iv) Appendix 0/5: Special national alterations of the Overseeing Department of Scotland, Wales or Northern Ireland. Appendix 0/4 contains a list of the Drawings. 2. The relevant publication date of each page of the Specification for Highway Works is given in the Schedule of Pages and Relevant Publication Dates. 3. An Additional Clause as indicated by a suffix 'A' in Appendix 0/5 is an alteration originating from the Overseeing Department of Scotland, Wales or Northern Ireland. An Additional Clause as indicated by a suffix 'AR' in Appendix 0/1 is a Contract-specific alteration. 4. A Substitute Clause, as indicated by the suffix 'S' in Appendix 0/5 is an alteration originating from the Overseeing Department of Scotland, Wales or Northern Ireland. A Substitute Clause as indicated by a suffix 'SR' in Appendix 0/1 is a Contract-specific alteration. 5. A Cancelled Clause as indicated by a suffix 'C' in Appendix 0/5 is an alteration originating from the Overseeing Department of Scotland, Wales or Northern Ireland. A Cancelled Clause indicated by a suffix 'CR' in Appendix 0/1 is a Contract-specific alteration. 6. Insofar as any of the Numbered Appendices may conflict or be inconsistent with any provision of the Specification for Highway Works the Numbered Appendices shall always prevail. Additionally, Numbered Appendices 0/1 and 0/2 shall take precedence over Numbered Appendix 0/5. 7. Any reference in the Contract to a Clause number or Appendix shall be deemed to refer to the corresponding Substitute Clause number or Appendix listed in Appendix 0/1, 0/2 or 0/5. 8. (08/93) Where a Clause is altered any original Table/Figure referred to in the Clause shall apply unless the Table/Figure is also altered. Where a Table/Figure is altered any reference in a Clause to the original Table/Figure shall apply to the altered Table/Figure. 9. Where a Clause in the Specification relates to work goods or materials which are not required for the Works it shall be deemed not to apply. 10. Any Appendix referred to in the Specification which is not used shall be deemed not to apply. 11. (08/94) Where a Clause or sub-Clause in the Specification is annotated by "08/93" or similar, this indicates the relevant publication date that alteration(s) to the Clause or sub-Clause were made. The first double digit refers to the month, and the second double digit refers to the year. 12. (08/94) Where a Clause in the Specification prefixed by an # this indicates that this particular Clause has a substitute National Alteration for one or more of the Overseeing Departments of Scotland, Wales or Northern Ireland. Substitute or additional National Clauses shall be used within countries to which they specifically apply and they are deemed to replace corresponding Clauses in the main text of the Specification or to be included within the Specification as appropriate. The substitute National Clauses are located at the end of the relevant Series together with the additional National Clauses of the Overseeing Departments.

Transcript of PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ......

Page 1: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 1 THURROCK COUNCIL

PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION

1. (08/93)

The Specification referred to in the Tender shall be the 'Specification for Highway Works', published by HMSO as

Volume 1 of the Manual of Contract Documents for Highway Works, as modified and extended by the following:

(i) Appendix 0/1: Contract-specific Additional, Substitute and Cancelled Clauses, Tables and Figures;

(ii) Appendix 0/2: Contract-specific minor alterations to existing Clauses, Tables and Figures;

(iii) The Numbered Appendices listed in Appendix 0/3;

(iv) Appendix 0/5: Special national alterations of the Overseeing Department of Scotland, Wales or Northern

Ireland.

Appendix 0/4 contains a list of the Drawings.

2. The relevant publication date of each page of the Specification for Highway Works is given in the Schedule of Pages

and Relevant Publication Dates.

3. An Additional Clause as indicated by a suffix 'A' in Appendix 0/5 is an alteration originating from the Overseeing

Department of Scotland, Wales or Northern Ireland. An Additional Clause as indicated by a suffix 'AR' in Appendix 0/1

is a Contract-specific alteration.

4. A Substitute Clause, as indicated by the suffix 'S' in Appendix 0/5 is an alteration originating from the Overseeing

Department of Scotland, Wales or Northern Ireland. A Substitute Clause as indicated by a suffix 'SR' in Appendix 0/1 is

a Contract-specific alteration.

5. A Cancelled Clause as indicated by a suffix 'C' in Appendix 0/5 is an alteration originating from the Overseeing

Department of Scotland, Wales or Northern Ireland. A Cancelled Clause indicated by a suffix 'CR' in Appendix 0/1 is a

Contract-specific alteration.

6. Insofar as any of the Numbered Appendices may conflict or be inconsistent with any provision of the Specification for

Highway Works the Numbered Appendices shall always prevail. Additionally, Numbered Appendices 0/1 and 0/2 shall

take precedence over Numbered Appendix 0/5.

7. Any reference in the Contract to a Clause number or Appendix shall be deemed to refer to the corresponding Substitute

Clause number or Appendix listed in Appendix 0/1, 0/2 or 0/5.

8. (08/93)

Where a Clause is altered any original Table/Figure referred to in the Clause shall apply unless the Table/Figure is

also altered. Where a Table/Figure is altered any reference in a Clause to the original Table/Figure shall apply to the

altered Table/Figure.

9. Where a Clause in the Specification relates to work goods or materials which are not required for the Works it shall be

deemed not to apply.

10. Any Appendix referred to in the Specification which is not used shall be deemed not to apply.

11. (08/94)

Where a Clause or sub-Clause in the Specification is annotated by "08/93" or similar, this indicates the relevant

publication date that alteration(s) to the Clause or sub-Clause were made. The first double digit refers to the month, and

the second double digit refers to the year.

12. (08/94)

Where a Clause in the Specification prefixed by an # this indicates that this particular Clause has a substitute

National Alteration for one or more of the Overseeing Departments of Scotland, Wales or Northern Ireland. Substitute

or additional National Clauses shall be used within countries to which they specifically apply and they are deemed to

replace corresponding Clauses in the main text of the Specification or to be included within the Specification as

appropriate. The substitute National Clauses are located at the end of the relevant Series together with the additional

National Clauses of the Overseeing Departments.

Page 2: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 2 THURROCK COUNCIL

SPECIFICATION FOR HIGHWAY WORKS

SCHEDULE OF PAGES AND RELEVANT PUBLICATION DATES

Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date

000 1 to 3 May 2014

000 4 to 7F February 2016

100 1 to 2, 4 to 9, 12 to 29F, WF1, N2 to N11F May 2014

100 3, 10 to 11, N1 December 2014

200 1 to 3F February 2016

300 1 May 2001

300 4 November 2002

300 2 to 3, 5 to 6F May 2008

400 1 to 6, 8, 10 to 13F November 2007

400 7, 9 November 2008

500 23 to 24, 26 November 2004

500 28F May 2005

500 3, 22, N1F May 2006

500 2, 5, 27 November 2006

500 6, 25 November 2007

500 1, 4, 7 to 21 November 2009

600 1 to 77F, S1, N1 to N6F February 2016

700 1 to 36F, N1 to N6F February 2016

800 1 to31F February 2016

900 2 to 5, 9 to 22, 24 to 26, 28 to 67F August 2008

900 1, 6 to 8, S1F November 2008

900 23, 27 May 2009

1000 1 to 45F February 2016

1100 1, 4F November 2004

1100 2, N1F November 2006

1100 3 August 2008

1200 5 May 2001

1200 2 to 3, W1F August 2003

1200 1, 14 to 16F May 2004

1200 4, 9 to 11, 13 May 2005

1200 12 November 2006

1200 6 to 7, N1 to N4F November 2007

1200 8 May 2008

Page 3: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 3 THURROCK COUNCIL

SPECIFICATION FOR HIGHWAY WORKS

SCHEDULE OF PAGES AND RELEVANT PUBLICATION DATES (continued)

Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date

1300 N2F November 2003

1300 3 to 4 November 2004

1300 1, 5 to 10, 12F November 2005

1300 2, 11 and N1 May 2006

1400 2, N1F May 2001

1400 1, 3 to 9F May 2006

1500 7 May 2001

1500 2 February 2003

1500 3 to 4, 8 to 11, 13 November 2004

1500 1, 5 to 6, 12, 14 to17F November 2006

1600 2, 6 to 8, 10 to 14, 16, 19, 27 to 28, 32 to 34, 36 to 37, 39

to 42, 44 to 48

November 2003

1600 3, 20 to 23, 43 November 2005

1700 1 to 27F December 2014

1800 1 to 35F August 2014

1900 1 to 35F, S1 to S2F August 2014

2000 1, 3 to 4F May 2001

2000 2 November 2004

2100 1, 2F February 2016

2300 1 March 1998

2300 2 to 3F May 2001

2400 1, 4, 7F May 2005

2400 2 May 2006

2400 3, 5 to 6 May 2008

2500 1 May 2001

2500 2, 8, 11F November 2003

2500 10 November 2004

2500 6 to 7, 9 May 2005

2500 5 May 2006

2500 3 to 4 November 2006

2600 1 March 1998

2600 2 to 4 November 2003

2600 5 November 204

2600 6 May 2005

2600 7F November 2006

3000 4 to 7, 10, 12 to 17, 19, 22 to 27F May 2001

3000 20 November 2004

3000 2 to 3 May 2006

3000 8 to 9, 11, 18, 21 May 2008

Page 4: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 4 THURROCK COUNCIL

SPECIFICATION FOR HIGHWAY WORKS

SCHEDULE OF PAGES AND RELEVANT PUBLICATION DATES (continued)

Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date

5000 1, 4 to 19F, S1F May 2005

5000 2 to 3 November 2008

Appendix A 1 to 4F May 2014

Appendix B 1 to 3F May 2014

Appendix C 1 to 2F May 2014

#Appendix D 1F May 2014

Appendix D (NI) N1F May 2014

#Appendix E 1F May 2014

Appendix F 1 to 52F February 2016

Appendix G Not Used

Appendix H 1 May 2004

Appendix H 2 November 2005

Appendix H 3 November 2006

Appendix H 4 to 9F November 2008

Page 5: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 5 THURROCK COUNCIL

Numbered and Lettered Appendices Appendix 0/1: Contract – Specific Additional, Substitute and Cancelled clauses, tables and figures included in the contract Part A: Volume 1 Specification

List of Additional Clauses, Tables and Figures Clause, Table or Figure No. Title 161 AR On Site Monitoring

170 AR Archaeological Investigation

171 AR Safety in Sewers 172 AR Depots 173 AR Task Orders 174 AR Road Closures 175 AR Site Safety 176 AR Not Used 177AR Sustainability 178AR Contractor’s Personnel 179AR Letter Drops 270AR Site Clearance - Generally 271AR Not used 272AR Not used 273AR Removal of Sign Posts and Foundations 274AR Not used 275AR Not used 571 AR Not used 572 AR Connection to Public Sewers 671 AR Backfilling to Disused Chambers and Cellars, Gully Pots and

Service Boxes

673 AR Excavation Below existing structural foundations 674 AR Removal of existing surfacing from bridge decks 675 AR Excavation of carriageway construction above existing

structures

770 AR Joints in Existing Concrete Carriageway 970AR Not used 971AR Geotextile Reflective Crack Control Membrane 1170 AR Timber Edgings 1171 AR Preparation and Surface Treatment of Formation of

Footways

1770 AR Structural Concrete repairs to damaged concrete 1771 AR Preparation of existing concrete deck slab to receive an

approved waterproofing system

1772 AR Deck Repair 1773 AR Removal of existing waterproofing and protective layer from

bridge deck

1774 AR Exposed aggregate treatment to concrete faces 1775 AR Concrete below existing foundations 1776 AR Concrete filling or backing in reinforced masonry walling 2370 AR Bridge expansion joints and sealing of gaps, sealing existing

joints

2470 AR Brickwork, blockwork and stonework repairs to areas other than arch rings and faces

2471 AR Brickwork, blockwork and stonework repairs to arch rings and faces

2472 AR Repointing

Page 6: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 6 THURROCK COUNCIL

2473 AR Salvaged brickwork, blockwork and stonework 2474 AR Surface treatment of new brickwork, blockwork and

stonework

2475 AR Pressure crack injection 2670AR Not used 2770 AR The Re-levelling of British Telecommunications Frames and

Covers

5070 AR Painting operations over live carriageways 7970 AR Restricted Working Hours 7971 AR Unsocial Working Hours 9073AR Depots 9074AR Not used 9075AR Not used 9076AR Works Orders 9077AR Not used 9078AR Not used 9079AR Not used

Page 7: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 7 THURROCK COUNCIL

List of Substitute Clauses, Tables and Figures

Clause, Table or Figure No. Title 921 SR Surface Macrotexture of Bituminous Surface Courses

Measured by the Volumetric Patch Technique

2405 SR Brickwork, Blockwork and stonework – lime mortar List of Cancelled Clauses, Tables and Figures Clause, Table or Figure No. Title None

Additional Clauses, Tables and Figures Clause, Table or Figure No.

Title and Written Text

SERIES 100 PRELIMINARIES

161 AR ON SITE MONITORING 1. Where confirmed by the Employer that it proposes to carry

out on-site monitoring, the following arrangements shall apply.

2. Monitoring officers reporting to the Employer may visit a sample of approximately 10% of sites to observe work in progress during normal working hours. There will also be occasional, random, visits to sites outside normal working hours. During these visits, the monitoring officers will check all aspects of quality, safety and consideration to the public. The programme of monitoring will be decided on a random basis and the Contractor will be given no advance information or warning of visits

3. In the event that the monitoring regime identifies non-conformance by the Contractor in any respect with the standard required by the contract, the Employer will determine whether such non-conformance has also been identified as such by the Contractor and programmed for rectification. Should this not be the case, he will meet with the Contractor or his representative and seek to reach agreement on a joint programme of additional checks intended either:

• To restore the Employer’s confidence that the Contractor is in general performing to the standard required by the contract, and that the non-conformance identified was exceptional; or

• To identify any systemic problems in the Contractor’s performance, with the aim of arriving at jointly agreed action to remedy these problems.

4. Such a programme of additional checks may include:

• Full inspection and checks of any re-work of non-conformant work;

• Additional monitoring visits to other contemporaneous works;

• Uncovering recently completed work; and

• Additional materials tests.

Page 8: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 8 THURROCK COUNCIL

5. Should agreement not be achieved between the Employer and the Contractor on a joint programme of additional checks, the Employer shall have power to implement a programme of checks designed to meet either of the above objectives. Full facilities shall be given to the Contractor to participate in such checks. The costs of such additional checks will be borne by the Contractor by deduction from accounts rendered

170 AR ARCHAEOLOGICAL INVESTIGATION 1. The Contractor shall give the Overseeing Organisation seven

days’ notice of the intention to undertake ground works and shall afford access to enable the Archaeologist to maintain a watching brief to record any matters or finds of archaeological significance.

2. The Contractor shall comply with the requirement of Appendix 1/13 where periods to be afforded to archaeological investigations after stripping of topsoil are detailed.

171 AR SAFETY IN SEWERS 1. The Contractor shall be aware and comply with Health and

Safety Guidelines Nos. 2 and 3 entitled “Safe Working in Sewers and at Sewage Works” and “Respiratory Protective Equipment” respectively, which are published by the National Joint Health and Safety Committee for the Water Service.

172 AR DEPOTS 1. Existing Term Contractor has established depot at Orsett

Cock Roundabout location. Contractor is to review this depot and make arrangements to continue with this depot or provide similar at location to be agreed with the Overseeing Organisation.

173 AR TASK ORDERS 1. All work will be ordered by the Overseeing Organisation on

Task Orders. The Contractor shall not carry out any work unless and until a Task Order has been issued by the Overseeing Organisation.

2. Each Task Order shall state: a) the nature, extent and location of the Works b) the date for commencement of the Works c) the time within which the Works shall be completed d) whether work outside normal working hours is required e) any restrictions on working hours f) whether traffic signal control is required g) any other special requirements

Page 9: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 9 THURROCK COUNCIL

Additional Clauses, Tables and Figures Clause, Table or Figure No.

Title and Written Text

174 AR ROAD CLOSURES 1. The Contractor shall comply with Appendix 1/17 for road

closures specified by the Overseeing Organisation 2. The Contractor shall provide, erect, maintain and

subsequently dismantle all signs, cones, barriers, lights etc necessary for the road closures and any diversion route and shall be paid for this on a Dayworks basis

175 AR SITE SAFETY 1. In the interests of site safety, high visibility warning clothing

shall be worn on the Site, by all Site personnel, at all times and where there is a foreseeable risk, safety helmets shall be worn. The high visibility warning clothing shall be as described in Clause 117.18

176 AR NOT USED 177 AR SUSTAINABILITY 1 The Contractor shall comply with the requirements described

in Appendix 1/70. 178AR CONTRACTOR’S PERSONNEL 1 The Contractor’s personnel employed in and about the

provision of the Works shall be competent skilled honest and properly and sufficiently experienced and qualified and shall at all times exercise care in the execution of their duties and the Contractor shall ensure that such persons are properly instructed and supervised with regard to the provision of the Works.

179AR LETTER DROPS 1 When instructed by the Employer, the Contractor shall

produce and deliver to properties affected by the works letters giving scheme information. The content of the letter shall be agreed with the Employer but shall as a minimum contain the following: Task Order title Brief description of the works Contractor’s contact name and telephone number

Page 10: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 10 THURROCK COUNCIL

Additional Clauses, Tables and Figures Clause, Table or Figure No.

Title and Written Text

SERIES 200 SITE CLEARANCE

270AR SITE CLEARANCE – GENERALLY 1. General site clearance will not be measured. 271AR NOT USED 272AR NOT USED 273AR REMOVAL OF SIGNPOSTS AND FOUNDATIONS 1. Posts for disposal shall be cut off either 150mm below ground

level, or flush with the top of the concrete foundation if this is less than 150mm below ground level.

2. Where the Works Order requires concrete foundations to sign posts to be removed, the void shall be filled and compacted in accordance with the appropriate Clauses in the 600 Series of Specification, and the surface reinstated to match the existing.

274AR Not used 275AR Not used SERIES 500 DRAINAGE AND SERVICE DUCTS

571 AR Not used 572 AR CONNECTIONS TO PUBLIC SEWERS 1. The requirements for connection to Public Sewers shall comply

with Appendix 5/70.

Page 11: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 11 THURROCK COUNCIL

Additional Clauses, Tables and Figures Clause, Table or Figure No.

Title and Written Text

SERIES 600 EARTHWORKS

671 AR BACKFILLING TO DISUSED CHAMBERS AND CELLARS, GULLY POTS AND SERVICE BOXES

1. Prior to sealing and filling any chamber, cellar, gully pot or service box the cover and frame shall be taken up and set aside for re-use or broken out and disposed of in accordance with Clause 201 and Appendix 2/3.

2. Gully pots and service boxes having a frame size not exceeding 0.1 square metres shall be cleared of all silt and debris which shall be removed to the Contractor’s tip, drainage holes and rodding eyes sealed with wooden, metal or stoneware plugs, and the gully pot or service box backfilled with STI concrete to Clause 2602. The concrete shall be brought up flush with the adjacent carriageway surface and finished in a neat and tidy manner.

3. Chamber, cellars and service boxes having a frame size 0.1 square metre and above shall be cleared of all silt and debris which shall be removed to the Contractor’s tip, and pumped clear of water. Pipe openings, drainage holes and rodding eyes shall be sealed with wooden, metal or stoneware plugs and concrete slabs, masonry and brickwork shall be broken out and any unsuitable material removed to the Contractor’s tip. Chambers, cellars and boxes shall be backfilled with fill material as stated in the Contract compacted in accordance with Clause 612 and 2602 as appropriate, brought up to required levels and finished in a neat and tidy manner.

673 AR EXCAVATION BELOW EXISTING STRUCTURAL FOUNDATIONS

1. .Excavation shall be carried out in a method which ensures that no shock or vibration is transmitted onto, or any damage is caused to, existing structures either above or adjacent to the excavation.

2. Excavation shall be restricted to a length which ensures the stability of existing structures and in no case shall be greater than one metre in length, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

3. During excavation and repair operations, the stability of existing structures shall be maintained by the installation of suitable supports designed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit his design to the Engineer for his approval. The Engineer’s approval will be general in nature and will not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the Contract.

4. Loadings on existing foundations will be advised by the Engineer upon request.

674 AR REMOVAL OF EXISTING SURFACING FROM BRIDGE DECKS

Page 12: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 12 THURROCK COUNCIL

1. The existing carriageway and footway surfacing shall be carefully removed, avoiding damage to the bridge deck.

2. Cold-milling (planing) shall be to Clause 917

3. The Contractor shall submit a detailed method statement for the removal of surfacing.

4. The Engineer will require a trial to be carried out before approval will be given for the full scale removal.

5. If the bridge is damaged during the removal of surfacing, repairs shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Engineer.

675 AR EXCAVATION OF CARRIAGEWAY CONSTRUCTION ABOVE EXISTING STRUCTURES

1. Excavation shall be carried out in a method which ensures that no shock or vibration is transmitted onto, or any damage is caused to, existing structures.

Page 13: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 13 THURROCK COUNCIL

Additional Clauses, Tables and Figures Clause, Table or Figure No.

Title and Written Text

SERIES 700 ROAD PAVEMENTS – GENERAL

770 AR JOINTS IN EXISTING CONCRETE CARRIAGEWAY General 1. All longitudinal and transverse joints to be sealed, shall be

sealed using one of the hot applied sealants as described in Clause 1017.

Joint Removal, Preparation and Saw Cutting 2. Joint sealant removal shall be carried out such that the existing

joint shall be completely removed without damaging the joint arrises.

3. The method of cleaning out joints shall be approved by the Overseeing Organisation

4. If spalling occurs or the angle of the former is greater than 10 degrees the joint sealing groove shall be sawn wider and perpendicular to the surface to encompass the defects up to a maximum width, including any chamfer, of 40mm for transverse joints and 25mm for longitudinal joints. If the spalling cannot be so eliminated, then the arris shall be repaired by one of the repair systems in the Contract as shown on the Drawings.

5. The sides of the joint sealing groove shall be scoured by dry abrasive blasting.

6. All grooves shall be cleaned of any dirt or loose material by blasting with compressed air which has been made oil free by filtering through a suitable coalescing filter. Particular attention should be made to prevent dust and abrasions being lodged in the joint crack.

7. The joints shall be allowed to dry, or a hot compressed air lance may be applied to the joint to remove all traces of moisture/water prior to priming and sealing. The Contractor shall ensure that no damage is done to the existing concrete during drying operations.

8. Cavities found in honeycombed concrete shall be filled prior to the application of joint sealant with approved filler.

9. Compressible caulking material, debonding strip or tape cord compatible with the sealant, of a suitable size to fill the width of the sealing grove shall be firmly packed or stuck in the bottom of the sealing groove to such a depth so as to provide the correct depth of seal as described in Table 7/70 with the top of the seal at the correct depth below the surface of the concrete.

10. If joint grooves are not initially constructed to provide the minimum dimensions for the seals they shall be enlarged by sawing.

Saw cutting shall be carried out such that the cut joint shall be formed with sides parallel throughout the depth and perpendicular to the road surface.

Page 14: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 14 THURROCK COUNCIL

Additional Clauses, Tables and Figures Clause, Table or Figure No.

Title and Written Text

11. The permitted tolerance for the new cutting shall be:- width = + 1mm or – 1mm

depth = + 2mm or – 2 mm 12. Slurry or dust from saw cutting operations shall not be

permitted onto the adjacent trafficked lanes, or allowed to enter adjoining filter drains. All dust and slurry shall be removed from the work area at the end of each working session.

Sealing with Applied Sealants 13. An appropriate primer for sealant shall be used and it shall be

applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, the primer incorporating a fugitive dye. The sealant shall be applied within the minimum and maximum drying times of the primer recommended by the manufacturer. Priming and sealing with applied sealants shall not be carried out when the naturally occurring temperature in the joint groove to be sealed is below 7oC.

14 When sealing operations are carried out near the lower air temperature limit, cold surfaces of exposed joints may cause rapid chilling of the hot applied sealant. To help compensate for this hot applied sealants shall be heated to their safe upper temperature limits for application as specified by their respective manufacturers.

15. Sealants shall be heated in and applied from a thermostatically controlled, indirectly heated dispenser with a recirculating pump. The sealants shall not be heated to a temperature higher than the safe heating temperature nor for a period longer than the safe heating period, both as specified by the manufacturer. The dispenser shall be cleaned out at the end of each day and reheated material shall not be used.

Testing of Applied Sealants 16. Independent certificates shall be supplied, which are not

more than six months old, stating that the sealant complies with the relevant standard in Clause 1017. Hot applied sealant shall be sampled at the rate and checked for dimensions as in BS 2499: Part 2.

Page 15: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 15 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/1: CONTRACT – SPECIFIC ADDITIONAL, SUBSTITUTE AND CANCELLED CLAUSES, TABLES AND FIGURES INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT PART A: VOLUME 1 SPECIFICATION

Additional Clauses, Tables and Figures Clause, Table or Figure No.

Title and Written Text

TABLE 7/70 Dimensions of Applied Joint Seals

Type and Spacing of Joints (m)

Minimum Width (mm)

Minimum Depth of Seal (mm) Depth of seal below the concrete surface (mm)

Cold Applied Hot Applied

Contraction

15 and under 13 15 5 + 2

Over 15 to 20 20 20 5 + 2

Over 20 to 25 30 25 5 + 2

Over 25 30 N/A 25 7 + 2

Expansion 30 25 7 + 2

Transverse

Warping 10 13 5 + 2

Longitudinal Joints (if sealed)

10 13 0 to 5

Gully and Manhole Slabs

20 20 0 to 3

Note: The depth of seal is that part in contact with the vertical face of the joint groove. The depth of seal below the surface shall be taken at the centre of an applied seal relative to a short straight edge, 150mm long, placed centrally across the joint.

Page 16: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 16 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/1: CONTRACT – SPECIFIC ADDITIONAL, SUBSTITUTE AND CANCELLED CLAUSES, TABLES AND FIGURES INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT PART A: VOLUME 1 SPECIFICATION Additional Clauses, Tables and Figures Clause, Table or Figure No.

Title and Written Text

SERIES 900 – ROAD PAVEMENTS – BITUMINOUS BOUND MATERIALS

970 AR Not used 971 AR GEOTEXTILE REFLECTIVE CRACK CONTROL MEMBRANE

1. The membrane shall be a non-woven, 100% polypropylene fabric with

the following characteristics:

(a) Tensile strength

ISO 10319/1 8.0kN/m minimum

(b) Elongation at Break (md)

ISO 10319/1 75% minimum

(c) Melting point

ASTM D.276 150°C minimum

(d) Asphalt retention

Task Force 25 Method 8

1.0 kg/m²

2. The surface of any existing pavement layer that is to be overlaid, whether directly with the membrane, or with a regulating course onto which the membrane will subsequently be laid, shall receive the following treatment.

(a) All cracks of width greater than 3mm shall be blown clean and dry with hot compressed air and filled with 60 - 80 pen grade filled bitumen incorporating 70 - 75% Limestone filler, using a screed box not exceeding 50mm wide.

(b) All potholes, or fretted areas shall be filled with regulating material of aggregate size appropriate for the depth of material laid.

(c) The minimum surface temperature shall be 5°C, and the surface shall be dry and swept free from dirt, oil, vegetation and other debris, by mechanical broom.

3. The binder shall be either 200 pen bitumen maintained in a tanker/spray

at 160ºC ± 5ºC and sprayed at a rate of 1.0 l/m2 ± 0.1 l/m2 or polymer modified emulsion binder containing at least 62% bitumen sprayed at

1.4 l/m2 ± 0.15 l/m2. If the surface is porous/pervious the rate shall be increased, with the agreement of the Overseeing Organisation, to allow for the binder lost into the surface. The binder shall be sprayed uniformly over the whole area on which the fabric is to be laid, plus 150mm at each side using pressure jets specifically designed and calibrated for the purpose. Hot bitumen shall only be sprayed on a dry surface.

Page 17: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 17 THURROCK COUNCIL

4. The fabric shall be laid out mechanically under sufficient light tension to ensure no wrinkling. Should wrinkling occur inadvertently the fold shall be slit and laid flat, permitting only a double thickness of material. Transverse joints shall be lapped in the direction of the paving but not exceeding 150 mm. Longitudinal laps shall be in the range 100 mm - 250 mm. All fabric must be bonded to the substrate with bitumen, and the Overseeing Organisation may permit additional bitumen to be placed manually to ensure this. The fabric shall be brushed with a stiff broom over its whole surface to ensure it is in contact with the bitumen film.

5. The surface of the fabric shall be rolled with a rubber coated drum vibroll or pneumatic tyred roller immediately after laying the fabric until intimate contact between the fabric and the surface upon which it is laid has been achieved.

6. The fabric may be overlaid immediately, if hot bitumen binder or chemically set bitumen emulsion (e.g. Nybreak) is used. For other bitumen emulsion a waiting period of 48 hours is required.

7. The fabric may be overlaid whilst wet, but all standing water shall be removed.

8 The fabric shall not be exposed to direct sunlight for a cumulative period exceeding 2 weeks prior to its being overlaid and shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

9. Construction and emergency traffic may run on the fabric immediately after laying. However, it must be ensured that damage is not caused to the membrane by vehicles turning, braking etc. and it must also be ensured that the membrane is kept clean of mud or other detritus. If damage occurs the affected area shall be removed and replaced. If the surface of the fabric becomes tacky with bitumen during construction, this may be blotted with sand to prevent spreading and pick-up of the fabric. Excess sand shall be removed by sweeping before overlaying

10. The material covering the membrane shall be laid and compacted at a temperature in the range of 95°C - 145°C.

SERIES 1100 KERBS, FOOTWAYS AND PAVED AREAS

1170 AR TIMBER EDGINGS

1. Timber edgings shall be as described in Drawing No. EB108

2. Timber for use as edging shall comply with the requirements of BS 5589 Section 3 performance Category B. It shall be preserved in compliance with Clause 311.

3. Retaining pegs shall be driven at 1.5 metres centres behind the edging. The edging shall be nailed to the retaining pegs with 2 No. x 4mm x 50mm round galvanised nails.

1171AR PREPARATION AND SURFACE TREATMENT OF FORMATION OF FOOTWAYS

1. The formation of footways shall comply with Clause 616.

Page 18: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 18 THURROCK COUNCIL

2. The footway formation shall be sprayed evenly over the whole area with total eradicator type weedkiller. The weedkiller shall be non-poisonous to human beings, animals and insects. The Contractor must obtain the approval of the Overseeing Organisation to the type of weedkiller before weedkiller is applied. The rate of spread of the weedkiller shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

1770AR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE REPAIRS TO DAMAGED CONCRETE 1. The material used for the repair of damaged concrete shall be a cementitious repair material complying with the general requirements of Departmental Standard BD27/86 2. The edges of damaged concrete to be removed shall be saw cut to a depth of 10mm. 3. All concrete within the saw cuts shall be removed to a depth of 20mm behind the steel reinforcement and the steel cleaned to bright steel by a method approved by the Engineer. 4. The exposed concrete and steel surfaces shall be prepared and primed and the repair material applied and cured in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 5. Any spillages shall be cleaned up and the concrete surface restored to its original profile and texture. 6. Details of the cementitious repair material proposed by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

1771AR PREPARATION OF EXISTING CONCRETE DECK SLAB TO RECEIVE AN APPROVED WATERPROOFING SYSTEM 1. Local areas of damaged concrete shall be repaired in accordance with Clause 1770AR. 2. Any areas of the existing concrete slab not complying with a Class U4 finish as defined in Clause 1708.4 shall be screeded with a cementitious levelling material such that the finished surface is uniform and shall not deviate from the required profile by more than 10mm over a 3 metre gauge length or have any abrupt irregularities of more than 3mm.

3. All cementitious levelling materials shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 4. Details of the cementitious levelling materials proposed by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. 5. Immediately prior to waterproofing the complete surface of the concrete slab shall be cleaned to remove all loose and friable material, weak cement laitance, contaminants, grease/ oil and traces of other bituminous materials, adhesives, primers and old waterproofing materials. The method of cleaning shall be approved by the Engineer.

Page 19: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 19 THURROCK COUNCIL

1772AR DECK REPAIR

1. If a bridge deck requires repair in any area the following method shall be used: (i) Edges of damaged concrete shall be cut back to leave square vertical faces; (ii) Concrete shall be cut away from any exposed reinforcement to give a minimum all round clearance to each bar of 20mm or twice the size of aggregate for the proposed repair material, whichever is the greater; (iii) The method of repair to damaged reinforcement shall be determined by the Engineer; (iv) Where necessary, formwork shall be provided in accordance with Clause 1710; (v) Areas of repair shall be thoroughly cleaned by a method approved by the Engineer to remove all dust, dirt, loose material and laitance; (vi) Concrete repairs shall be carried out using an approved Polyurethane Resin Modified Concrete composite applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

1773AR REMOVAL OF EXISTING WATERPROOFING AND PROTECTIVE LAYER FROM BRIDGE DECK 1. The existing waterproofing shall be removed by a method approved by the Engineer. 2. Removal shall be carried out in a manner which avoids damage to the bridge deck. 3. The deck shall be thoroughly cleaned to allow inspection by the Engineer. Following this inspection the Engineer shall determine the method of deck preparation for the proposed waterproofing system. 4. If the bridge deck is damaged during the removal of the waterproofing, repairs shall be carried out in accordance with Clause 1772AR.

1774AR EXPOSED AGGREGATE TREATMENT TO CONCRETE FACES 1.Where required by the Engineer, concrete faces shall be abrasive blasted after the removal of formwork to expose the coarse aggregate. The type of abrasive material to be used and the standard of finish to be attained will be determined by the Engineer following practical tests carried out on a trial panel constructed in accordance with Clause 1708. No alteration shall be made in the methods employed or in the type of abrasive material after such a test has been approved by the Engineer and the standard of finish achieved in the permanent work shall conform with the approved finish of the test panel. 2.Abrasive blasting shall be carried out not earlier

Page 20: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 20 THURROCK COUNCIL

than two weeks after the casting of the concrete by a skilled operator experienced in the technique. Each area shall be treated in one continuous operation, starting at a top corner and working continuously across and down the face. Adjacent fair-faced areas shall be adequately masked during the blasting process.

3.On completion, the treated area shall be washed with clean water and scrubbed down with a stiff brush. The finished surface shall present an even and uniform appearance with the laitance removed and the coarse aggregate exposed to a depth of 3 to 4mm in the case of 10mm sized aggregate and 5 to 6mm in the case of 20mm aggregate. 4.The abrasive blasting method employed shall incorporate an effective method of dust and debris collection local to the area under treatment to prevent nuisance outside the works.

1775AR CONCRETE BELOW EXISTING FOUNDATIONS 1. Excavations below existing structural foundations shall be filled with partly filled hessian bags containing a dry concrete mix of cement, sand and coarse aggregate in the following proportions: • 1 part sulphate resisting cement to BS4027 • 2 parts dry sand • 4 parts dry gravel or crushed rock coarse aggregate, maximum size 20mm. 2. The materials used shall be thoroughly mixed and comply with Series 1700 of the Specification. 3. When the void below the existing foundation has been filled with concrete, 20mm diameter steel reinforcement bars shall be driven through the bags into the adjacent ground at 300mm centres for a distance of 750mm. 4. The length of reinforcement shall be determined and cut on site and shall be such that the bars extend from the ground to 100mm from the exposed face of the concrete bags. 5. All work is to be carried out in the dry, with the works kept free of water.

1776AR CONCRETE FILLING OR BACKING IN REINFORCED

MASONRY WALLING 1.Prior to placing the concrete all mortar and other debris shall be removed from the void and loose mortar removed from masonry faces and from protruding ties or reinforcement. 2.The concrete for filling or backing shall, in addition to complying with the requirements of Clause 1701, be as of stiff a consistency as is practical to compact in the void. 3.During placing of the concrete, measures shall be

Page 21: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 21 THURROCK COUNCIL

taken to ensure that the masonry is not displaced. Such measures should include one or more of the following: • curing the masonry skins for a suitable period prior to placing the concrete fill or backing, • placing the concrete in low lifts as the masonry proceeds, • controlling the rate of concrete pour, • providing temporary external support, • such other measures approved by the Enginer.

2370AR BRIDGE EXPANSION JOINTS AND SEALING OF GAPS SEALING EXISTING JOINTS 1.All existing obstructions and debris are to be removed from the joint and the joint filled to within 10mm from the face of the joint with an approved joint filler board. In joints where the existing board extends to the surface of the joint the board shall be raked out to a depth of 10mm from the surface of the joint. 2.The adjacent surfaces shall be masked and an approved primer applied to the surfaces within the 10mm depth of the joint and the joint subsequently filled to the surface with an approved cold applied sealant. 3.Upon hardening, the joints between new brickwork, blockwork or stonework shall with filled with mortar, designation determined by the Engineer. 4.Whilst hardening, the brickwork, blockwork or stonework shall be held in place with temporary timber wedges and/ or formwork.

2470AR BRICKWORK, BLOCKWORK AND STONEWORK REPAIRS TO AREAS OTHER THAN ARCH RINGS AND FACES 1.Loose or defective brickwork, blockwork and stonework shall be carefully cut out to a depth of not less than 150mm. Care shall be taken to avoid damaging adjacent sound material and temporary props shall be employed as necessary to minimise the risk of movement in the remaining structure. 2.The cavity shall be trimmed and cleared of all debris and loose material prior to reconstruction. 3.Where the resulting cavity is deeper than the existing brickwork, blockwork or stonework the additional void shall be filled with mortar, concrete, brickwork, blockwork or stonework as directed by the Engineer. 4.Brickwork, blockwork or stonework required to restore the thickness of the existing work shall be constructed using as much of the undamaged original material as possible. All new material shall be of the same type, colour, size, facial treatment and coursing as the existing. Replacement stonework shall be at least 150mm thick.

Page 22: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 22 THURROCK COUNCIL

5.Where directed by the Engineer new facework shall be tied back to the original structure using 8mm diameter, 175mm long stainless steel ties anchored into the existing sound structure to a depth of 100mm with epoxy resin. Ties shall be positioned at 225mm vertical and horizontal centres unless otherwise specified by the Engineer. 6.The mortar designation shall be as specified by the Engineer.

2471AR BRICKWORK, BLOCKWORK AND STONEWORK REPAIRS TO ARCH RINGS AND FACES 1.Surfaces to receive new brickwork, blockwork or stonework shall be clean, dry and sound before priming. 2.The new brickwork, blockwork or stonework shall be of the same type, colour, size and coursing as the existing and shall be secured to the existing structure with an epoxy resin mortar which shall fill all the voids between the new and existing brickwork, blockwork or stonework to within 10mm of the exposed surface.

2742AR REPOINTING 1.Joints or cracks shall be raked out to sound material and all loose debris removed by blowing with compressed air or suitable methods as approved by the Engineer. Minimum depth shall be 15mm for bricks, blocks and cut stone and 25mm for random rubble. 2.The mortar designation shall be as specified by the Engineer. 3.Where pressure pointing is specified or proposed, pointing trials shall be undertaken as required by the Engineer. The surface finish shall be as specified by the Engineer. 4.Bedding and pointing shall be undertaken as a continuous operation and the joints or cracks shall be completely filled with mortar. 5.The filled joints or cracks shall be protected to the satisfaction of the Engineer to ensure that they are not subject to shock or vibration for 24 hours after repointing and to ensure that the temperature of the mortar does not fall below 3 degrees Centigrade for three days after installation. 6.Joints or cracks shall not be pointed when the shade air temperature is less than 3 degrees Centigrade.

7.Where pointing is specified to ‘dry stone’ wall construction, the face of the pointing shall be kept back 25mm from the face of the masonry to maintain the appearance of dry stone walling.

2473AR SALVAGED BRICKWORK, BLOCKWORK AND

Page 23: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 23 THURROCK COUNCIL

STONEWORK 1.Prior to incorporation in new works, all salvaged brickwork, blockwork or stonework which the Contractor intends to reuse shall be approved by the Engineer.

2474AR SURFACE TREATMENT OF NEW BRICKWORK, BLOCKWORK AND STONEWORK 1.Where new brickwork, blockwork or stonework is to be used in combination with adjacent salvaged or original material, the surface of the new material shall be treated to obtain a colour and texture finish acceptable to the Engineer. 2.The method of treatment shall cause no damage to the new material and must be approved by the Engineer.

2475AR PRESSURE CRACK INJECTION

1.Cracks shall be raked out to sound material and all loose debris removed by water jetting, blowing with compressed air or other suitable method approved by the Engineer. 2.All crack filling material shall be mixed and injected strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 3.On completion of the crack injection operation the surface of the crack shall be flush with the adjacent brickwork, blockwork or stonework. 4.Cracks greater than 2mm wide shall be filled with a cementitious non-shrink grout.

5.Cracks less than 2mm wide shall be filled with an epoxy resin. 6.Details of cementitious non-shrink grout and epoxy resin proposed by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

SERIES 2600 GENERAL MAINTENANCE UNIT

2670 AR Not used SERIES 2700 ACCOMMODATION WORKS

AND WORKS FOR STATUTORY UNDERTAKERS

2770 AR THE RE-LEVELLING OF BRITISH TELECOMMUNICATIONS FRAMES AND COVERS

1. General

This Clause describes the method that shall be employed whenever British Telecommunications (BT) frames and covers are raised, lowered or replaced to conform to the road surface, footway or verge level. The works shall include the re-bedding or extending of the chamber/shaft of up to two courses of engineering brickwork or placement of slip bricks/quarry tiles to achieve the correct surface level.

2. Testing for Gas

Page 24: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 24 THURROCK COUNCIL

The Contractor shall take the necessary steps to ensure that the jointing chamber is free from gas before commencing work. If gas is discovered then the jointing chamber cover shall be carefully replaced and no work is to take place. The BT External Plant Maintenance Control must immediately be informed using the Freephone Dial Before You Dig service.

Page 25: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 25 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/1: CONTRACT – SPECIFIC ADDITIONAL, SUBSTITUTE AND CANCELLED CLAUSES, TABLES AND FIGURES INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT PART A: VOLUME 1 SPECIFICATION Additional Clauses, Tables and Figures Clause, Table or Figure No.

Title and Written Text

3. Inspection of Frames and Covers

If, in the opinion of the BT representative, the existing frame and cover(s) is not fit for re-levelling, they shall be replaced by the appropriate BT standard item. Where a frame and cover(s) is unsuitable and the replacement item is larger than the existing chamber (walls or shaft), then information for recommended modifications to the chamber will be supplied by BT.

4. Re-Levelling Frames and Covers in the Footway or Verge

Once the cover(s) and cross piece(s) are removed, remove the frame from the chamber. Prepare the frame, if applicable, for reuse by removing all the old bedding material, debris and rust. Remove all existing bedding material from the uppermost surfaces of the chamber (walls or shaft) to leave a clean dry surface.

All brickwork that the frame is to be bedded on must be sound and if necessary, removed, re-bedded or re-pointed.

If the change in level is less than 25mm then either: Place the frame in position level with the surface by using packing pieces under each corner of the frame. All voids under the frame shall be filled with cement mortar and any excess mortar shall be neatly trowelled and struck off in line with the inside of the frame.

Or A thick bed of cement mortar shall be trowelled around the uppermost surface of the chamber (walls or shaft) and the frame tamped and bedded on the mortar so the frame is level with the surface. All voids under the frame shall be filled with cement mortar and any excess mortar shall be neatly trowelled and struck off in line with the inside of the frame.

5. Re-Levelling Frames and Covers in the Carriageway

The work shall be carried out using quick setting materials in order to allow completion of the work and reopening of the carriageway to traffic within a working day.

(a) Materials

(i) Resin Mortar

This is a three component, quick setting, resin compound comprising a translucent liquid resin, a white powder hardener and a sand filler. The complete pack shall be readily divisible into two half packs.

Once the hardener has been added, the mortar will have a working life of 20 minutes and the initial set will take place after approximately 30 minutes.

Page 26: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 26 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/1: CONTRACT – SPECIFIC ADDITIONAL, SUBSTITUTE AND CANCELLED CLAUSES, TABLES AND FIGURES INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT PART A: VOLUME 1 SPECIFICATION Additional Clauses, Tables and Figures

Clause, Table or Figure No.

Title and Written Text

(ii) Resin Bedding This is a three component, quick setting, resin compound comprising a translucent liquid resin, a white powder hardener and a heat absorbing filler. The complete pack shall be readily divisible into two half packs. Once the hardener has been added the mortar will have a working life of 20 minutes and the initial set will take place after approximately 30 minutes.

(b) Method If the original frame and cover is to be reused all covers shall be marked so that when replaced they occupy the same position as they did before removal.

If a new frame and cover is to be used refer to paragraph 3 above.

Remove the covers and excavate an area around the frame approximately 150mm wide, and to the depth of the frame taking care not to damage the chamber (walls or shaft). Remove the cover and prepare it for reuse if applicable.

Prepare the surface of the chamber (walls or shaft) at 165mm below the carriageway surface by cutting back or building up as described in paragraph 4. If building up by engineering bricks or tiles being bonded with resin mortar the gap between the frame and the chamber to be between 12mm and 25mm. The finished surface must be free from debris and any water deposits.

Locate the frame square in the chamber (walls or shaft) and level it with the carriageway surface by supporting it in each corner with broken tiles or other suitable material.

On the inside of the chamber, face off the gap under the frame and chamber with a thin bead of resin mortar, this will act as an inside shutter to contain the resin bedding.

Allow the mortar an initial set, which is indicated when it feels firm against finger pressure, then mix and pour the resin bedding around the frame until it just covers the lower frame flange (as shown in Drawing No. ER 101).

Page 27: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 27 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/1: CONTRACT – SPECIFIC ADDITIONAL, SUBSTITUTE AND CANCELLED CLAUSES, TABLES AND FIGURES INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT PART A: VOLUME 1 SPECIFICATION Additional Clauses, Tables and Figures

Clause, Table or Figure No.

Title and Written Text

Allow a minimum of 2 hours to elapse before replacing the cover(s). It is important not to disturb the frame before this time period in any way. Check that the covers do not rock or foul the chamber (walls or shaft) or removable grids. If the covers rock take whatever corrective action is necessary and ensure that the cover is free from debris and/or resin material.

6. Safety When mixing and using resin bedding or resin mortar the following precautions must be observed:-

(a) Barrier cream shall be used for exposed hands and forearms.

(b) Disposable gloves should be worn.

(c) Mixing should be in a well ventilated, but wind shielded location.

(d) Eyeshields should be worn during mixing as the white powdered hardener contains a small proportion of peroxide.

(e) An orignasal type respirator, fitted with a dust and organic vapour filter should be worn.

(f) The disposal of all waste material, cans and plastic bags must be at an approved tip, the details of which can be obtained from the Local Authority.

7. Security To enhance security against the unauthorised entry of BT chambers, when Lockable Frames and Covers are renewed, relevelled or replaced, the Frame shall be bedded on the shaft or chamber, with Resin Bedding.

8. Reinstatement Prior to reinstatement in a bituminous surface, the sides of the excavation and the outside of the frame shall be primed with bitumen emulsion and the space surrounding the frame reinstated with Rolled Asphalt Surface Course (Design Mix) to Clause 911. Where only Resin Materials have been used, for re-levelling frames and covers, then reinstatement can commence 2 hours after the last batch of material has been placed.

5070 AR PAINTING OPERATIONS OVER LIVE CARRIAGEWAYS

Page 28: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 28 THURROCK COUNCIL

1. A solid barrier of sufficient strength to retain tools, materials and the like shall be attached to the existing structure beyond the outer face of the parapet in a manner to be approved by the Engineer.

2. Whilst preparing and repainting parapets over live carriageways, equipment and material shall not be placed beyond the outer face of the parapet and all small tools shall be securely attached to operatives.

Page 29: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 29 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/1: CONTRACT – SPECIFIC ADDITIONAL, SUBSTITUTE AND CANCELLED CLAUSES, TABLES AND FIGURES INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT PART A: VOLUME 1 SPECIFICATION Additional Clauses, Tables and Figures

Clause, Table or Figure No.

Title and Written Text

SERIES 7900 ADJUSTMENTS

7970AR RESTRICTED WORKING HOURS

1 Restrictions on working hours shall be as described in Appendix 1/7 7971AR UNSOCIAL WORKING HOURS 1 Unsocial working hours are hours outside the normal working day as

defined in Appendix 1/9. These hours shall only be worked when specifically instructed by the Overseeing Organisation.

9073AR DEPOTS 1. The Contractor shall inform the Overseeing Organisation which depots

will be used to comply with the Response Details described above. 2. Access shall be made available to the Overseeing Organisation at all

times for the purpose of checking the availability of equipment to be used for the Emergency Response service.

9076AR TASK ORDERS 1. Task Orders shall be issued verbally by the Overseeing Organisation

followed by confirmation in writing. The Orders shall contain the following information: a) Name of person giving instruction b) Time of issue of instruction c) Road name and/or number d) Description of location e) Grid reference - if possible f) Description of incident g) Whether Response Unit or Traffic Management Response Unit or

Clinical Waste Response Unit is required h) Additional equipment or plant required i) Name of person to report to on site (if appropriate)

Page 30: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 30 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/1: CONTRACT – SPECIFIC ADDITIONAL, SUBSTITUTE AND CANCELLED CLAUSES, TABLES AND FIGURES INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT PART A: VOLUME 1 SPECIFICATION Substitute Clauses, Tables and Figures

Clause, Table or Figure No.

Title and Written Text

921 SR SURFACE MACROTEXTURE OF BITUMINOUS SURFACE COURSES MEASURED BY THE VOLUMETRIC PATCH TECHNIQUE

1 The macrotexture depth of the surface of bituminous surface courses shall be measured by a Volumetric Patch Technique described in BS EN 13036-1.

2 Where stated in Appendix 7/1 the average macrotexture depth determined by the volumetric patch technique shall be in accordance with Table 9/85

Table 9/85

AVERAGE MACROTEXTURE DEPTH DETERMINED BY THE VOLUMETRIC PATCH TECHNIQUE

Macrotexture Depth

Site Grade Thin Surfacing Level

Average not less than per Carriageway Lane Length

Average of not less than

Individual 10 Measurements

Individual Measurements

High Macrotexture

3 1.5 1.2 Not less than 1.1 nor more than 2.5

Medium Macrotexture

2 1.2 1.0 Not less than 0.9 nor more than 1.8

Low Macrotexture

1 0.9 0.7 Not less than 0.7 nor more than 1.3

Page 31: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 31 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/1: CONTRACT – SPECIFIC ADDITIONAL, SUBSTITUTE AND CANCELLED CLAUSES, TABLES AND FIGURES INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT PART A: VOLUME 1 SPECIFICATION Substitute Clauses, Tables and Figures Clause, Table or Figure No.

Title and Written Text

3 The surface macrotexture depth shall be measured not more than 7 days after the surfacing has been laid and where practicable before the surfacing has been opened to traffic. Measurements shall be made and the macrotexture determined as follows:- over sections of each carriageway lane 1000m in length, or the complete carriageway lane where this is less than 1000m. on lane lengths not exceeding 50m in length regularly spaced along the section and covering not less than one third of the section tested. on each lane length 10 individual measurements shall be taken at equal spacing along a diagonal line across the lane width. No measurement shall be taken within 300mm of the longitudinal edge of the carriageway.

where the determination of average macrotexture depth for a section of the carriageway lane, based on measurements taken over part of the section, is less than shown in the Contract, measurements shall be extended to cover the complete length of the section and the average macrotexture depth recalculated.

4 Where the width of surface course to be laid is less than a full lane width then the measurements shall be taken across the width of surfacing actually laid, in accordance with Sub-Clause 2 of this Clause

5. This requirement for macrotexture depth overrides the requirements for texture depth in Clauses 7.3.1 to 7.3.3 of BS 594: Part 2.

Page 32: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 32 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/1: CONTRACT – SPECIFIC ADDITIONAL, SUBSTITUTE AND CANCELLED CLAUSES, TABLES AND FIGURES INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT PART A: VOLUME 1 SPECIFICATION Substitute Clauses, Tables and Figures Clause, Table or Figure No.

Title and Written Text

2405 SR BRICKWORK, BLOCKWORK AND STONEWORK

LIME MORTAR 1.Lime mortar shall be used for brickwork, blockwork and stonework only where specified by the Engineer. 2.Lime mortar shall be mixed in the following proportions; • 1 part hydraulic lime, • 2 parts well graded, washed sharp sand including 3 to 4mm flint particles to BS1198, 1199 and 1200 “Specifications for building sands from natural sources” • 1 part porous limestone or brick aggregate (pozzolanic material) On no account shall cement of any kind be added to the mix. 3.Pointing shall be finished flat and slightly recessed. After the initial set of the lime mortar the texture of the aggregate shall be exposed with a stipple brush. Modern metal trowels shall not be used for finishing the pointing and under no circumstances shall the pointing be struck. 4.Before commencing work a test panel shall be submitted for the approval of the Engineer. This panel may be a part of the structure and shall be no less than 0.5m2 of face brickwork

Page 33: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 33 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/2: CONTRACT – SPECIFIC MINOR ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING CLAUSES, TABLES AND FIGURES INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT PART A: VOLUME 1 SPECIFICATION Clause, Table or Figure No.

Alterations to be made

507.1 Delete second sentence. Insert ‘Chambers shall be of the type specified in Appendix 5/1, constructed in accordance with HCD Drawings Numbers F3 to F12 and F25 to F27 or ECC Drawings Nos. EF101, EF103, EF109, EF113, EF114, EF115, EF118, EF119, as appropriate to that type’.

507.6 BS 1247:Part 1 or Part 2, See also BS EN 13101:2002 508.6 Delete first two sentences. Insert ‘Backfilling to precast gullies shall be

carried out up to formation level in ST2 concrete’.

609.4 (i) BS 6906: Part 1. See also BS EN ISO 10319: 1996

1217.3 BS 505:1971(AMD 1990,1976). See also BS EN 12368:2000.

1305.4 Delete ‘ST5’. Insert ‘ST2’.

1418.7 Delete ‘mix ST2 concrete’. Insert ‘ST4 concrete’.

1424.1 Delete the whole sub-Clause. Insert ‘1. Every lighting unit, and network on completion and before being

energised, shall be inspected and tested to verify that the requirements of BS 7671 have been met. The required testing will normally be carried out before a network is energised, but in situations where this is not possible, due to phasing or for operational reasons, the specified testing shall not be undertaken until the network is complete. The method of testing shall be such that no danger to persons or property or damage to equipment can occur even if the circuit tested is defective.’

1424 Add new sub-Clause 8 as follows:- ‘8. Where the network has been completed and energised in advance of

completion of the whole works, then, on completion of the whole works, the network shall have specific tests and measurements repeated. The required tests are described in Appendix 14/4(7) and shall be witnessed by the Overseeing Organisation for the adopting authority’.

1606.22 BS 7079: Part A1 See also BS EN ISO 8501-1

1903.1 BS 7079-F7. See also BS EN ISO 11126-7.

Page 34: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 34 THURROCK COUNCIL

Series 1700 – Structural Concrete 1701 Concrete – General In sub-Clause 1, delete the 2nd sentence. 1702 Concrete – Constituent Materials In sub-Clause 1, delete “Appendix 17/4” and insert “Appendix 17/1”. In sub-Clause 2, delete “Appendix 17/4” and insert “Appendix 17/1”. In sub-Clause 3, delete “Appendix 17/4” and insert “Appendix 17/1”. 1704 Concrete – General Requirements In sub-Clause 2, insert “as” before “described in Appendix 17/1”. 1707 Concrete – Conformity and Identity Testing In sub-Clause 1, delete “Appendix 17/4” and insert “Appendix 17/1”. 1708 Concrete – Surface Finish In sub-Clause 1, delete “When required in Appendix 17/3 and”. In sub-Clause 4(i), Class F4, delete “or in other positions as described in Appendix 17/3”. In sub-Clause 4(i), delete “Other classes. The finishes shall comply with the specific requirements described in Appendix 17/3.” In sub-Clause 4(i), delete “Unless otherwise described in Appendix 17/3” and insert “Unless otherwise described in Appendix 17/1”. In sub-Clause 4(ii), delete “Other classes. The finishes shall comply with the specific requirements described in Appendix 17/3.” 1709 Concrete – Surface Impregnation In sub-Clause 1, delete “to those surfaces described in Appendix 17/2”. Delete existing sub-Clause 5(iii) and insert new sub-Clause 5(iii) and 5(iv) as follows:

iii) Graffiti and encrusted surface deposits and labels glued to the surface shall be removed using appropriate solvents or other means accepted by the Employer and compatible with the application of silane.

Page 35: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 35 THURROCK COUNCIL

iv) Medium pressure water jetting using a rotating spray head and pressure not exceeding 85 kg/cm² may be used as a means of surface preparation provided a minimum of 14 calendar days elapse between the jetting and impregnation operations.

Insert new sub-Clause 9, as follows:

“Data Sheets

9. Not more than 24 hours after the impregnation of any concrete surfaces the Contractor shall provide the Employer with data sheets giving the following information:

a) a precise description of the surfaces impregnated;

b) the volume of material applied to each of these surfaces; and

c) the batch numbers or such other information as shall permit the material used to be identified from the certificates supplied in accordance with sub-Clause 2(iii) of this Clause.”

Series 1900 Protection of Steelwork Against Corrosion Minor Amendments to Existing Clauses 1901 Introduction In sub-Clause 1, delete from “using systems” to the end. In sub-Clause 3, delete “Appendix 19/5” and insert “Appendix 19/1”. 1902 Surface Preparation – General Requirements In sub-Clause 1, delete “Appendix 19/5” and insert “Appendix 19/1”. In sub-Clause 10, delete “Appendix 19/5” and insert “Appendix 19/1”. 1903 Surface Preparation – Materials and Methods In sub-Clause 1, delete “Appendix 19/5” and insert “Appendix 19/1”. In sub-Clause 12, delete “Appendix 19/5” and insert “Appendix 19/1”. In sub-Clause 13, delete “Appendix 19/5” and insert “Appendix 19/1”. In sub-Clause 20, delete “Appendix 19/5” and insert “Appendix 19/1”. 1906 Procedures for Treatment at Joints

Page 36: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 36 THURROCK COUNCIL

In sub-Clause 8, delete “Appendix 19/5” and insert “Appendix 19/1”. In sub-Clause 12, delete “Appendix 19/2” and insert “Appendix 19/1”. In sub-Clause 16, delete “Appendix 19/5” and insert “Appendix 19/1”. In sub-Clause 23, delete “or Appendix 19/2”. 1909 Metal Coatings In sub-Clause 1, delete “Appendix 19/5” and insert “Appendix 19/1”. In sub-Clause 2, delete “Appendix 19/5” and insert “Appendix 19/1”. In sub-Clause 3, delete “Appendix 19/5” and insert “Appendix 19/1”. 1911 Paint and Similar Protective Coatings In sub-Clause 5, delete “Appendix 19/5” and insert “Appendix 19/1”. In sub-Clause 5, delete “as named by” to the end. 1912 Testing of Paints In sub-Clause 1, delete “Appendix 19/5” and insert “Appendix 19/1”. In sub-Clause 7, delete “Appendix 19/4”. In sub-Clause 11, delete “Appendix 19/4”. In sub-Clause 15, delete “Appendix 19/4”. 1914 Application of Paint In sub-Clause 3, delete “Appendix 19/2” and insert “Appendix 19/1”. In sub-Clause 7, delete “Appendix 19/1”. In sub-Clause 13, delete “Appendix 19/1”. 1915 Procedure Trials In sub-Clause 1, delete “Appendix 19/5” and insert “Appendix 19/1”. 1917

Page 37: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 37 THURROCK COUNCIL

Surfaces in Contact with Concrete In sub-Clause 1, delete “Appendix 19/5” and insert “Appendix 19/1”. In sub-Clause 3, delete “Appendix 19/5” and insert “Appendix 19/1”. 1918 Form HA/P1 (New Works) Paint System Sheet (Appendix 19/1) Form HA/P2 Paint Data Sheet (Appendix 19/3) In the title, delete “Appendix 19/1” and “Appendix 19/3”. In sub-Clause 1, delete “Appendix 19/1” and “Appendix 19/3”. In sub-Clause 2, delete “Appendix 19/1”. 1920 Additional Requirements for the Protection of Steel in Bridge Bearings In sub-Clause 1, delete “Appendix 19/5” and insert “Appendix 19/1”. In sub-Clause 1, delete “Appendix 19/1 and with”. In sub-Clause 2, delete “Appendix 19/1”. 1921 Additional Requirements for the Protection of CCTV Masts, Cantilever Masts, Steel Lighting Columns and Bracket Arms In sub-Clause 1, delete “Appendix 19/1 and with”. Series 2100 Bridge Bearings Minor Amendments to Existing Clauses 2104 Amendments and Additions to BS5400 : Part 9 : Section 9.2 : 1983 In the amendment to clause 6.1, delete from the inserted text “Aluminium alloy . . . . . . . . . . Appendix 21/2.” Series 2300 Bridge Expansion Joints and Sealing of Gaps Minor Amendments to Existing Clauses 2302 Installation of Bridge Deck Expansion Joints In sub-Clause 5, delete “as described in Appendix 23/1”. 2303 Sealing of Gaps

Page 38: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 38 THURROCK COUNCIL

Delete sub-Clause 1 and renumber sub-Clauses 2 to 7 as 1 to 6.

Page 39: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 39 THURROCK COUNCIL

Series 2400 – Brickwork, Blockwork and Stonework Minor Amendments to Existing Clauses 2404 Mortar In sub-Clause 5, after “mechanically” insert “in a mortar mill”. In sub-Clause 5, after the first sentence insert “The use of rotating drum mixers shall not be permitted.” Insert new sub-Clause 7, as follows: “The Contractor shall ensure that all constituent materials for the mortar are stored in an appropriate manner that will offer protection from adverse weather conditions.” 2417 Unreinforced Masonry Arch Bridges In sub-Clause 4, delete “as described in Appendix 24/1”. In sub-Clause 22, delete “to Clause 1043”. In sub-Clause 25, delete “conforming to Clause 1043”. In sub-Clause 28, delete “as described in Appendix 24/1”. Series 2600 Miscellaneous Minor Amendments to Existing Clauses 2601 Bedding Mortar In sub-Clause 1(i), delete “Unless otherwise described in Appendix 26/2”. In sub-Clause 1(i), delete “50 N/mm2” and insert “30 N/mm2”. In sub-Clause 1(ii), delete “or as otherwise described in Appendix 26/2”. In sub-Clause 1, delete “and Appendix 26/2 for other applications”. In sub-Clause 3(v), delete “except where described in Appendix 26/2”. 2602 Concrete for Ancillary Purposes In sub-Clause 1, delete “and any additional requirements in Appendix 26/1”. In sub-Clause 3, delete “where required in Appendix 26/1”. In sub-Clause 4, delete “unless otherwise described in Appendix 26/1”. In sub-Clause 6, delete “unless otherwise described in Appendix 26/1” (twice). In sub-Clause 9, delete “unless otherwise described in Appendix 26/1”.

Page 40: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 40 THURROCK COUNCIL

Series 5000 - Maintenance Painting of Steelwork Minor Amendments to Existing Clauses 5001 Introduction In sub-Clause 1, delete “and Appendix 50/2 if applicable”. In sub-Clause 3, delete “described in Appendix 50/5” and insert “required by the Employer”. 5002 Surface Preparation – General Requirements In sub-Clause 1, delete “as specified in Appendix 50/1” and insert “will be specified by the Employer”. 5003 Surface Preparation – Materials and Methods In sub-Clause 5, delete “specified in Appendix 50/1”. In sub-Clause 6, delete “specified in Appendix 50/1”. In sub-Clause 7, delete “specified in Appendix 50/1” (twice). In sub-Clause 25, delete “specified in Appendix 50/1”. 5009 Testing of Paints In sub-Clause 8, delete “Appendix 50/4” and insert “Appendix 50/3”. In sub-Clause 12, delete “Appendix 50/4” and insert “Appendix 50/3”. In sub-Clause 16, delete “Appendix 50/4” and insert “Appendix 50/3”. 5013 Form HA/P1 (Maintenance) Paint System Sheet (Appendix 50/1) Form HA/P2 Paint Data Sheet (Appendix 50/3) In the title, delete “Appendix 50/3” and insert “Appendix 50/2”. In sub-Clause 1, delete “Appendix 50/3” and insert “Appendix 50/2”.

Page 41: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 41 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/2: CONTRACT – SPECIFIC MINOR ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING CLAUSES, TABLES AND FIGURES INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT PART A: VOLUME 1 SPECIFICATION Amendments to Volume 1 Appendix F 1. BRITISH STANDARDS

British Standard Alterations to be made

BS 505:1971 See also BS EN 12368:2000.

BS 598:102: 2003 Add ‘Amendment 1, 2004’

BS 873: Part 5: 1983 See also BS EN 12899-1: 2001.

BS 873: Part 6: 1983

See also BS EN 12899-1: 2001.

BS 1377: Part 4 Add ‘Amendment AMD 13925, 2003’

BS 1722: Part 11

Delete. Insert ‘BS 1722: Part 11:2000 Specification for prefabricated wood panel fences.’

BS 1722: Part 12

Add ‘Amendment 1, 2003’.

BS 1722 Add ‘BS 1722: Part 14: 2001 Specifications for open mesh steel panel fences.

BS 2000-397: 1995

See also BS EN 12967-3 and BS EN 12697-4.

BS 2449:Part 1: 1993 See also BS EN 14188-1:2004

BS 2782: Part 5: Method 550A

See also BS 2782: Part 5: Method 550B: 1996. Methods of exposure to direct weathering, to weathering using glass – filtered daylight and to intensified weathering by daylight using Fresnel mirrors.

BS 4443: Part 1 See also BS EN ISO 845: 1995, BS EN ISO 1798: 2000, BS EN ISO 1923: 1995, BS EN ISO 1856: 1996 and BS EN ISO 3386-1 and 2: 1998.

BS 4443: Part 4 See also BS EN ISO 2440: 2000.

BS 4660:2000 Add: Corrigendum AMD 13946, 2003’. See also BS EN 13598-1: 2003

BS 5467: 1997

Add, ‘Amendment 1, 2004’.

BS 5911: Part 100

See also BS 5911-1: 2002

BS 5911: Part 103 See also BS 5911-5: 2002

BS 6004: 2000 Add ‘Amendment 1, 2004’

BS 6073-1: 1981 Add ‘Amendment AMD 14523, 2003’

BS 6121 Part 1: 1999 See also BS EN 50262: 1999

Page 42: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 42 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/2: CONTRACT – SPECIFIC MINOR ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING CLAUSES, TABLES AND FIGURES INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT PART A: VOLUME 1 SPECIFICATION

Amendments to Volume 1 Appendix F 1. BRITISH STANDARDS British Standard Alterations to be made

BS 6346 Add ‘Amendment 1, 2004’.

BS 7079: Part A1: 1989

Add ‘Amendment AMD 13362, 2003’

BS 7282: 1990 See also BS EN 252.

BS 7533 Add ‘BS 7533-1:2001 Guide for the structural design of heavy duty pavements constructed with clay pavers or precast concrete paving blocks’. Add ‘Clauses 1104, 1107 and 1108’. Add ‘BS 7533-6: 1999 Code of practice for laying natural stone, precast concrete and clay kerb units’. Add ‘Clause 1104’. Add ‘BS 7533-7: 2002 Code of practice for the construction of pavements of natural stone setts and cobbles’. Add ‘Clause 1104’.

BS 7818:1995 Add ‘Corrigendum 1 AMD 15047, 2004’

BS 7962:2000 Add ‘Amendment 1, 2004’.

BS 8500-1: 2002 Add ‘Amendment 1, 2003’.

BS 8500-2: 2002 Add ‘Amendment 1, 2003’.

BS EN 197-1: 2000

Add ‘Amendment 1, 2004’.

BS EN 206-1: 2000

Add ‘Amendment 1 AMD 14857, 2004, Amendment 2 AMD 15359, 2004’

BS EN 288-3: 1992

See also BS EN IS0 1514-1:2004

BS EN 933-3: 1997

Add ‘Amendment 1, 2004’.

BS EN 1011-1: 1998

Add ‘Amendment 2, AMD 14225, 2004’.

BS EN 1011-2: 2001 Add ‘Amendment 1 AMD 14926, 2004’.

BS EN 1011-3: 2000

Add ‘Amendment 1 AMD 14927, 2004’.

BS EN 1011-4: 2000 Add ‘Amendment 1 AMD 14928, 2004’.

BS EN 1423 Add ‘Amendment 1, 2004’.

BS EN 1424: 1998 Add ‘Amendment 1 AMD 14286, 2003’

BS EN 1436: 1998 Add ‘Amendment AMD 14288, 2003’

BS EN 1463-1: 1998 Add ‘Amendment 1, 2004’.

Page 43: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 43 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/2: CONTRACT – SPECIFIC MINOR ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING CLAUSES, TABLES AND FIGURES INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT PART A: VOLUME 1 SPECIFICATION

Amendments to Volume 1 Appendix F 1. BRITISH STANDARDS British Standard Alterations to be made

BS EN 1714:1998

Add ‘Amendment 1, 2003, Amendment 2, AMD 14941, 2004’.

BS EN 10142 See also BS EN 10326:2004

BS EN 10147 See also BS EN 10326:2004

BS EN 10326:2004 Continuously hot-dip coated strip and sheet of structural steels. Technical delivery conditions. See also BS EN 10147:2000

BS EN ISO 845 BS EN ISO 845: 1995 Cellular plastics and rubbers. Determination of apparent (bulk) density. Amendment AMD 8978, 1995. See also BS 4443: Part 1: 1988.

BS EN ISO 1923 BS EN ISO 1923: 1995 Cellular plastics and rubbers. Determination of linear dimensions. See also BS 4443: Part 1.

BS EN ISO 2897-2: 2003

Add ‘Corrigendum 1 AMD 15075, 2004’.

Page 44: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 44 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/2: CONTRACT – SPECIFIC MINOR ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING CLAUSES, TABLES AND FIGURES INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT PART A: VOLUME 1 SPECIFICATION

Amendments to Volume 1 Appendix F 3. EUROPEAN STANDARDS Standard

Alterations to be made

EN 12 272-2

Delete. See BS EN 12272-2: 2003

Page 45: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 45 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/2: CONTRACT – SPECIFIC MINOR ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING CLAUSES, TABLES AND FIGURES INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT PART A: VOLUME 1 SPECIFICATION

Amendments to Volume 1 Appendix F 5. DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORT; DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENT, TRANSPORT AND THE REGIONS; SCOTTISH DEVELOPMENT DEPARTMENT; THE SCOTTISH OFFICE; WELSH OFFICE; AND DEPARTMENT OF THE ENVIRONMENT FOR NORTHERN IRELAND PUBLICATIONS Publication

Alterations to be made

(i)

Traffic Signs Manual Chapter 7. The Design of Traffic Signs Delete 1997 Edition. Insert 2003 Edition.

Page 46: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 46 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/3: LIST OF NUMBERED APPENDICES REFERRED TO IN THE SPECIFICATION AND INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT Appendix 0/3 is comprised of two lists, A and B, of Numbered Appendices as follows:- List ‘A’ is a complete list of the Numbered Appendices referred to in the Specification for Highway Works with those not adopted marked “Not Used”. Those identified by the letters (T) or (C) shall be completed by the Tenderer or Contractor respectively. Those identified by the letter (I) are for the Contractors information only and those identified by the letter (P) shall not be altered in any way.

Volume No.

Completed By

Appendix No.

Appendix Title

INTRODUCTION

0/1 Contract – specific Additional, Substitute and Cancelled Clauses, Tables and Figures Included in the Contract.

0/2 Contract – specific Minor Alterations to Existing Clauses, Tables and Figures Included in the Contract.

0/3 List of Numbered Appendices Referred to in the Specification and Included in the Contract.

0/4 List of Drawings Included in the Contract.

0/5 Not used.

PRELIMINARIES

1/1 Temporary Accommodation and Equipment for the Overseeing Organisation.

1/2 Not Used

1/3 Not Used

1/4 Working and Fabrication Drawings.

1/5 Testing to be Carried out by the Contractor.

1/6 Supply and delivery of samples to the Engineer

1/7 Site Extent and Limitations on Use.

1/8 Operatives for the Overseeing Organisation.

1/9 Control of Noise and Vibration.

1/10 Not Used

1/11 Not Used

Page 47: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 47 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/3: LIST OF NUMBERED APPENDICES REFERRED TO IN THE SPECIFICATION AND INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT (continued) Volume No.

Completed By

Appendix No.

Appendix Title

1/12 Setting out and Existing Ground Levels.

1/13 Programme of Works.

1/14 Payment Applications.

1/15 Not Used

(C) 1/16 Privately and Publicly Owned Services and Supplies.

1/17 Traffic Safety and Management.

1/18 Temporary Diversions for Traffic.

1/19 Routeing of Vehicles.

1/20 Not Used

1/21 Information Boards.

1/22 Not Used

1/23 Risks to Health and Safety from Materials or Substances.

1/24 Not Used

1/25 Not Used

1/26 Not Used

1/27 Not Used

SITE CLEARANCE 2/1 Not Used

2/2 Not Used

2/3 Not Used

2/4 Not Used

2/5 Not Used

FENCING 3/1 Fencing, Gates and Stiles.

ROAD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (VEHICLE AND

PEDESTRIAN)

Page 48: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 48 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/3: LIST OF NUMBERED APPENDICES REFERRED TO IN THE SPECIFICATION AND INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT (continued) Volume No.

Completed By

Appendix No.

Appendix Title

4/1 Road Restraint Systems (Vehicle and Pedestrian)..

(C) 4/2 Not Used

DRAINAGE AND SERVICE DUCTS 5/1 Drainage Requirements.

5/2 Service Duct Requirements.

5/3 Not Used

5/4 Not Used

5/5 Combined Drainage and Kerb Systems. 5/6 Not Used

5/7 Not Used

EARTHWORKS

6/1 Requirements for Acceptability and Testing etc. of

Earthworks Materials.

6/2 Not Used

6/3 Requirements for Excavation, Deposition, Compaction (Other than Dynamic Compaction).

6/4 Requirements for Class 3 Material.

6/5 Geotextiles Used to Separate Earthworks Materials

6/6 Not Used

6/7 Sub-formation and Capping and Preparation and Surface Treatment of Formation.

6/8 Topsoiling,

6/9 Not Used

6/10 Not Used

6/11 Not Used

Page 49: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 49 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/3: LIST OF NUMBERED APPENDICES REFERRED TO IN THE SPECIFICATION AND INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT (continued) Volume No.

Completed By

Appendix No.

Appendix Title

6/12 Not Used

6/13 Not Used

6/14 Not Used

6/15 Not Used

ROAD PAVEMENTS – GENERAL

7/1 Permitted Pavement Options (Schedules 1,2 3, 4 and 5).

7/2 Excavation, Trimming and Reinstatement of Existing Surfaces.

(C) (T) (P) 7/3 Surface Dressing

7/4 Bond Coats, Tack Coats and Other Bituminous Sprays (Sheets 1, 2 and Binder Data Sheet).

7/5 Not Used

7/6 Breaking Up or Perforation of Existing Pavement.

(C) (T) (P) 7/7 Slurry Sealing/Micro Surfacing

7/8 Stone Mastic Asphalt Surface Course.

7/9 Cold-Milling (Planing) of Bituminous Bound Flexible Pavement .

(C) 7/10 Not Used

7/11 Not Used

7/12 Not Used

7/13 Not Used

7/14 Not Used

7/15 Not Used

7/16 Not Used

(C) 7/17 Not Used

Page 50: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 50 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/3: LIST OF NUMBERED APPENDICES REFERRED TO IN THE SPECIFICATION AND INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT (continued) Volume No.

Completed By

Appendix No.

Appendix Title

7/18 Not Used

7/19 Not Used

7/20 Not Used

(C)(T) 7/21 Not Used

7/22 Not Used

ROAD PAVEMENTS – CONCRETE AND CEMENT BOUND MATERIALS

(T) 10/1 Not Used

KERBS, FOOTWAYS AND PAVED AREAS 11/1 Kerbs, Footways and Paved Areas.

11/2 Not Used

TRAFFIC SIGNS 12/1 Traffic Signs: General.

12/2 Traffic Signs: Marker Posts.

12/3 Traffic Signs: Road Markings and Studs.

12/4 Not Used

12/5 Traffic Signs: Traffic Signals

12/6 Not Used

ROAD LIGHTING COLUMNS AND BRACKETS, CCTV

MASTS AND CANTILEVER MASTS

13/1 Not Used

(C)(P) 13/2 Column and Bracket Data Sheets 1 AND 2

(P) 13/3 Instructions for Completion of Column and Bracket Data Sheets

13/4 Not Used

APPENDIX 0/3: LIST OF NUMBERED APPENDICES REFERRED TO IN THE SPECIFICATION AND INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT (continued)

Page 51: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 51 THURROCK COUNCIL

Volume No.

Completed By

Appendix No.

Appendix Title

(C)(P) 13/5 Not Used

(P) 13/6 Not Used

(T) 13/7 Not Used

(C)(P) 13/8 Not Used

(P) 13/9 Not Used

ELECTRICAL WORK FOR ROAD LIGHTING AND TRAFFIC SIGNS

14/1 Site Records.

14/2 Not Used

14/3 Temporary Lighting.

(C) 14/4 Electrical Equipment for Road Lighting.

14/5 Electrical Equipment for Traffic Signs.

MOTORWAY COMMUNICATIONS

15/1 Not Used

15/2 Not Used

PILING AND EMBEDDED RETAINING WALLS 16/1 Not Used

16/2 Not Used

16/3 Not Used

16/4 Not Used

16/5 Not Used

16/6 Not Used

16/7 Not Used

16/8 Not Used

16/9 Not Used

16/10 Not Used

Page 52: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 52 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/3: LIST OF NUMBERED APPENDICES REFERRED TO IN THE SPECIFICATION AND INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT (continued) Volume No.

Completed By

Appendix No.

Appendix Title

16/11 Not Used

16/12 Not Used

16/13 Not Used

16/14 Not Used

16/15 Not Used

16/16 Not Used

16/17 Not Used

16/18 Not Used

STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

17/1 Concrete Classification of Mixes

17/2 Concrete – Impregnation Schedule

17/3 Concrete – Surface Finishes

17/4 Concrete - General

17/5 Buried Concrete

17/6 Not Used

STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

18/1 Not Used

PROTECTION OF STEELWORK AGAINST CORROSION

(C) (P) 19/1 Not Used

(C) (P) 19/2 Not Used

(C) (P) 19/3 Not Used

(C) (P) 19/4 Not Used

19/5 Not Used

WATERPROOFING FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES

20/1 Waterproofing for concrete structures

Page 53: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 53 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/3: LIST OF NUMBERED APPENDICES REFERRED TO IN THE SPECIFICATION AND INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT (continued) Volume No.

Completed By

Appendix No.

Appendix Title

BRIDGE BEARINGS 21/1 Not Used

2200 SERIES 22/1 Not used.

BRIDGE EXPANSION JOINTS AND SEALING OF GAPS 23/1 Bride deck expansion joints schedule

23/2 Sealing of gaps schedule (other than in bridge deck

expansion joints)

BRICKWORK, BLOCKWORK AND STONEWORK 24/1 Brickwork, Blockwork and Stonework.

SPECIAL STRUCTURES 25/1 Not Used

25/2 Not Used

25/3 Not Used

25/4 Not Used

25/5 Not Used

MISCELLANEOUS 26/1 Ancillary Concrete

26/2 Not Used

26/3 Not Used

LANDSCAPE AND ECOLOGY

(C)(P) 30/1 Not Used

30/2 Not Used

30/3 Not Used

30/4 Not Used

30/5 Grass Seeding, Wildflower Seeding and Turfing

(C)(P) 30/6 Not Used

Page 54: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 54 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/3: LIST OF NUMBERED APPENDICES REFERRED TO IN THE SPECIFICATION AND INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT (continued) Volume No.

Completed By

Appendix No.

Appendix Title

30/7 Not Used

30/8 Not Used

30/9 Not Used

30/10 Not Used

30/11 Not Used

30/12 Not Used

MAINTENANCE PAINTING OF STEELWORK

(C) (P) 50/1 Not Used

(C) (P) 50/2 Not Used

(C) (P) 50/3 Not Used

(C) (P) 50/4 Not Used

50/5 Not Used

Page 55: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 55 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/3: LIST OF NUMBERED APPENDICES REFERRED TO IN THE SPECIFICATION AND INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT List ‘B’ gives the list of Contract-specific Numbered Appendices devised for the Contract.

Volume No.

Appendix No.

Appendix Title

1/70 Sustainability

5/70 Connections to Public Sewers

27/AR1 Routine Maintenance of Lighting Units and Feeder Pillars

Page 56: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 56 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/4: LIST OF DRAWINGS INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT 2. Standard Drawings. 2(i) Supplied to each Tenderer.

Drawing No. Title Volume No. EA100 Shared surface carriageway - Type 5 Estate Roads EA101 Type 5 Estate Road EA102 Type 8 Estate Road – Mews Court EB100 Kerb Types EB101 Details of Dropper Kerb Types EB102 Edging Types EB103 Access Type A, B, C & D Composite Construction EB104 Access Type E Concrete Construction EB105 Cross Section of Kerb, Edging and Footway EB106 Permitted Alternative Construction EB107 Typical Carriageway Construction Details EB108 Timber Edging Type EFT EB109 Reinstatement of Pavement EB110 Paved Chevrons to Roundabouts EB111 Repair of Carriageway Surface Cracks EB112 Paved Area Type F EB114 Edge of Haunch EB115 Kerb Bed – Mortar or Epoxy Resin EB116 Pram Crossing at Bellmouth EB117 Precast Paving Slab on Edge EB118 Access Types A, C, E, F & G, Layout Details EB119 Access Types A, C, E, F & G, Section AA Construction Details EB120 Details of Conservation Kerbs EB121 Tactile Paving EB122 Tactile Pavement Arrangements – Types A, C, D, E & F EB123 Tactile Pavement Arrangements – Types G, I & J EB124 Estate Roads – Carriageway and Footway Construction EB125 Independent Footpaths EB126 Trief Kerbs EB127 Corduroy Hazard Warning Scheme EB128 Segregated Shared Cycle Track/Footway Tactile Surface EB129 Details of Bus kerb EB130 Ramps and Accesses across Chevrons to Roundabouts EC100 Joint Repairs EC101 Concrete Beam : Connection of Existing and Proposed –

Carriageway Slabs

EC102 Connection of a Concrete Estate Road to an existing Concrete Road Layout

EC103 Concrete Road Bay Layout EC104 Connection of Concrete and Flexible Construction ED100 Typical Markings Detail EE100 Marker Posts EF103 For Pipes max diameter. Maximum Depth 1500 Type 17 –

Chamber (Sectional Concrete Inspection Manhole)

EF104 Small Headwall for Pipes 100 to 300 diameter – Drainage Outfall to Ditch

Page 57: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 57 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/4: LIST OF DRAWINGS INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT

2. Standard Drawings.

2(i) Supplied to each Tenderer (continued) Drawing No. Title Volume No. EF105 Mass Concrete Headwall Type A less than 1200 deep EF106 Mass Concrete Headwall Type A between 1200 and 1800

deep

EF107 Reinforced Concrete Headwall Type C1 EF108 Reinforced Concrete Headwall Type C2 EF109 Precast Concrete Soakaway EF110 Combined Drainage and Kerb Block EF111 Combined Drainage and Kerb Block EF112 Combined Drainage and Kerb Block EF113 For Pipes 1200 Max Dia 3000 - 4000 depth to Top of Base

Slab – Type 12 Chamber (Precast Concrete Chamber)

EF114 For Pipes 1200 Max Dia 4000 - 6000 depth to Top of Base Slab – Type 13 Chamber (Precast Concrete Catchpit)

EF115 For Pipes 1200 Max Dia 4000 - 8000 depth to Top of Base Slab – Type 14 Chamber (Precast Concrete Catchpit)

EF116 Filter (French and Combined) Drains Trench and Bedding Details

EF117 Filter (French and Combined) Drains Surface Details EF118 For Pipes 900 Maximum Dia. 900 to 2000 depth + Pipe Dia. –

Type 15 Chamber (Precast Concrete Foul Water Manhole)

EF119 For Pipes 900 Maximum Dia. 3000 to 6000 depth + Pipe Dia. – Type 16 Chamber (Precast Concrete Foul Water Manhole)

EF120 Counterfort and Herringbone Drains EF121 Precast and Insitu Cast Gullies EF122 Interceptor Installation EF123 Double Gully EF124 Reinforced Concrete Headwall Type D EF125 Yard Gully EF126 Junction Insertion Connection – for Nominal size 100 – 600 EF127 Drainage Channel EF128 Brick Gully : Types G3/G4 EF129 Footway Drainage Channels and Blocks and Catchpits –

Types 18 and 19

EF130 Vertical Backdrop Detail EF131 For Pipes Max Dia. 0 – 3000 Depth to Top of Base slab –

Type 20 Chamber (Precast Concrete Catchpit)

EH100 Steel Double Field Gate 6.02 metres wide EH101 Five Strand Barbed Wire fence 1.5 metres high EH102 Environmental Barrier – 1.8 metres high EH103 Environmental Barrier – 2.0 metres high EH104 Environmental Barrier – 2.55 metres high EH105 Steel Double Field Gate 7.22 metres wide EH106 Timber Double Field Gate Type 2 EH107 Timber Pedestrian Guard Railing EH108 Pedestrian Steps in Side Slopes EH109 Ranch Type Fencing 3 Rail 0.9 metres high EH110 Pedestrian Guardrail EH111 Environmental Barrier – 2.0 metres high (Steel Posts)

Page 58: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 58 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/4: LIST OF DRAWINGS INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT

2. Standard Drawings.

2(i) Supplied to each Tenderer (continued) Drawing No. Title Volume No. EH112 Environmental Barrier – 2.5 metres high (Steel Posts) EH113 Post and Tubular Rail Fence EH114 Timber Stile, Type 3 EH115 Timber Stile, Type 4 EH116 Pedestrian Barrier EI100 Brick Inspection Chamber for Traffic Signal Ducts EI101 UPVC Chamber Details for Traffic Signal Ducts EJ100 Patching Types 1, 2 & 3 EJ101 Patching Types 4 & 5 EL101 Steel Road Lighting Column EL105 Typical Base Layout for Lighting Columns Fitted with Integral

Gear Lanterns and with Private Cable Connections

EL106 Schematic Wiring Diagram for Lighting Columns with Integral Gear Lanterns and Private Cable Connections

EL107 Schedule of Lighting Columns and Brackets EL108 Details of base for Flange Plate Lighting Columns EL109 Anchorage Cage for Flange Plate Lighting Columns (8m to

15m)

EL110 Typical Base Layout for Lighting Columns Fitted with Integral Gear Lanterns and with Electricity Company Supply

EL111 Schematic Wiring Diagrams for Lighting Columns Fitted with Integral Gear Lanterns and with Electricity Company Supply

EL112 Typical Arrangement of Combined Pedestrian Crossing Beacon and Light

EM101 Typical Lighting Cable (Underground) Details EM102 Typical Feeder Pillar Housing EM103 Typical Feeder Pillar Layout and Wiring Diagram for Single

P.E. Cell Group Switched System (415V, 3 dia.)

EM104 Typical Arrangement of Mini-Pillar – Single Outgoing Circuit EM105 Typical Feeder Pillar Layout and Wiring Diagram for Locally

Switched System

EM106 Typical Feeder Pillar Layout and Wiring Diagram for Locally Switched System

EM107 Typical Arrangement of Mini Feeder Pillar to serve more than one Outgoing Circuit

EM108 Typical Internal Arrangement of Cabling within Baselite Bollard EM109 Typical Fixing Details for Baselite Shearpin Box EM110 Typical Arrangement of Earth Electrode and Bonding EM111 General Arrangement of Post with Photo Electric Cell Detector

for 240V Group Switched Systems

EM112 Typical Feeder Pillar Layout and Wiring Diagram for Group Switched System (240V, 5dia.)

EM114 Typical Feeder Pillar Layout and Wiring Diagram for 3 P.E. Cell, Group Switched System (415V 3 dia.)

EM115 General Arrangement of Post with Three Photo-Electric Cell Detectors for 415V 3 Phase, Group Switched Systems

EM116 Typical Feeder Pillar Layout & Wiring Diagram for 3-Phase System with Locally Switched Columns

Page 59: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 59 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/4: LIST OF DRAWINGS INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT 2. Standard Drawings. 2(i) Supplied to each Tenderer (continued) Drawing No. Title Volume No. EN100 Typical Sign Detail EN101 Single Aspect Traffic Bollard EN102 Typical Sign Base Layout and Sign Light Wiring for Sign with

Private Supply Cable

EN103 Schedule of Existing Traffic Signs to be Resited EN105 Typical Sign Base Layout and Lantern Wiring for Sign with

Electricity Company Supply Cable

EO100 Drawing Title EO101 Drawing Title EP100 P2/113 Kph Parapet Fixing Detail EQ100 Information Board EQ101 Maintenance Information Board EQ102 Precast Concrete Bollard ER100 British telecom Joint Box JBF 10A, 10B & 10C ER101 Re-levelling of British Telecommunications Frames and

Covers in Carriageway

ES100 Standard Timber Footbridge Type 1 ES101 Standard Timber Footbridge Type 2 ES102 Standard Timber Footbridge Types 3 and 4

SD99/04/001

SD99/04/002

SD99/04/003

SD99/04/004

Pedestrian Guardrail Type M2 & SM2

Trip Rail Type 1 ( Galvanised Steel )

Trip Rail Type 2 ( Timber )

Steel Cycle Stand (Type 1)

SD99/05/001

SD99/05/002

SD99/05/003

SD99/05/004

SD99/05/005

SD99/05/006

SD99/05/007

SD99/05/008

SD99/05/012

SD99/05/013

SD99/05/015

SD99/05/016

SD99/05/017

SD99/05/018

Precast and In situ cast gullies Type 1

Typical Gully Detail Type G2

Typical Gully Detail Type G3

Typical Gully Detail Type G4

Typical Gully Detail Type G5

Typical Gully Detail Type G6

Typical Gully Detail Type G7

Chamber Type 15 for Pipes 900 mm max dia and 3000 mm depth

Duct Trench & Bedding Details Type A and B

UPVC Chamber Type SC1 and LB1

Junction Insertion Connection

Chamber Type 11 for Pipes 1200 mm max dia and 3000 mm depth

UPVC Chamber Type SC2 and LB2

UPVC Electrical Inspection Chamber Type EC1 and EC2

SD99/07/001

SD99/07/002

SD99/07/004

SD99/07/006

Typical Trench Reinstatements

Flat Top Humps Types F & FT (Bituminous)

Round Top Humps Types R and Rt (Bituminous)

Bituminous Road Cushion Detail

Page 60: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 60 THURROCK COUNCIL

SD99/07/007

SD99/07/009

SD99/07/010

SD99/07/012

SD99/07/013

SD99/07/014

SD99/07/016

Flat Top Block Paving Road Hump Type A1 to A3 (Formpave)

Block Paving Road Cushion Type A

Flat Top Red bituminous Road Hump Type A1 to A3 (Formpave) Bituminous

Raised / Domed Road Markings

Permitted Alternative Construction

Typical Carriageway Construction Detail

Precast Concrete Speed Cushion

SD99/11/001

SD99/11/002

SD99/11/003

SD99/11/004

SD99/11/005

SD99/11/006

SD99/11/007

SD99/11/008

SD99/11/009

SD99/11/010

SD99/11/011

SD99/11/012

SD99/11/013

Kerb Details 1

Kerb Details 2

Cross Section of Kerb, Edging and Footway

Footway Construction Details No 1

Footway Construction Details PCC small element paving

Tactile Paving Details at Crossings

Traffic Island Construction Details Island Types A1 to A7

Traffic Island Construction Details Island Types B1 to B7

Traffic Island Construction Details Island Types C and C1

Traffic Island Construction Details Island Type E

Edging Types

Traffic Island Construction Details Island Type F

Timber Edging EFT

Volume 3

SD99/12/001

SD99/12/002

SD99/12/003

SD99/12/004

SD99/12/005

SD99/12/006

SD99/12/008

SD99/12/009

SD99/12/010

SD99/12/014

Traffic Sign and Post Details (1)

Traffic Sign and Post Details (2)

Traffic Sign Details - High Mast Beacon Type 1and Belisha Beacon

Traffic Bollard Detail

Chamber Type PT1, Poletech Unit with Cable Access Box

Chamber Type PT2, Poletech Unit

Steel/Concrete Bollard Details

Zebra Crossing Detail

Humped Zebra Crossing Detail (Bitumious Paved)

Ducting Box Type 1

SD99/14/014

SD99/14/015

Typical Sign Base Layout and Lantern Wiring for Electricity Company Supply

Cable

Typical Sign Base Layout and Lantern Wiring for Private Supply Cable

APPENDIX 0/4: LIST OF DRAWINGS INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT 2. Standard Drawings 2.(ii) Inspected by Tenderers. Drawing No. Title Aspect Required if Not Whole

Drawing NONE

Page 61: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 61 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 0/4: LIST OF DRAWINGS INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT

2. Standard Drawings

2.(iii) Brought Into the Contract by Reference.

(a) Highway Construction Details (HCD) published by The Stationery Office (formerly HMSO) as Volume 3 of the Manual of Contract Documents for Highway Works contains the following drawings brought into the Contract by reference. Unless otherwise stated below the whole drawing is brought into the Contract.

HCD : SECTION 1 Carriageway and Other Details

Drg No

Title Aspect/Alternative(s) Required if not whole drawing

APPENDIX 0/4: LIST OF DRAWINGS INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT 2. Standard Drawings 2.(iii) Brought Into the Contract by Reference. (b) Minor alterations to be made to the Highway Construction Details listed above are as follows:- Drawing No.

Title Date Aspect/Alternative(s) Required if Not Whole Drawing

F13

Precast and In situ Cast Gullies

Nov ‘03

Precast Gully. Delete reference to fill material or concrete to SHW Clause 508.6. Insert ST2 concrete to SHW Clause 508.6

Delete reference to 102.5 Brickwork to SHW 2400 Series. Insert 225 Brickwork to SHW 2400 Series.

Page 62: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 62 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/1: TEMPORARY ACCOMMODATION AND EQUIPMENT FOR THE OVERSEEING ORGANISATION

Note: Thurrock Council Planning Department have not been approached regarding planning permission

for Temporary Accommodation.

(a) Accommodation Required

(i) The Engineer will not normally require temporary accommodation.

(b) Duration of Time Accommodation Required

(i) A contract period shall be agreed between the Contractor and the Engineer before an Order

for Works is placed. This agreed contract period shall be that period for the payment of

servicing of offices for the Contractor.

Page 63: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 63 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/4: WORKING AND FABRICATION DRAWINGS 1/4.1 Working and Fabrication Drawings a) Whenever required by the Overseeing Organisation, the Contractor shall

supply calculations, test reports, data sheets, etc., in support of his detailed working and fabrication drawings. Such documents shall become the property of the Overseeing Organisation.

b) In the case of works where approval by a third party is required, the Contractor

shall submit an additional copy of the relevant documents to the Overseeing Organisation.

c) The submission of particulars in all other cases shall be reproduced in a clear

and legible manner in durable materials. Drawings shall be to an appropriate scale and in sufficient detail to enable the Overseeing Organisation to examine and assess the Contractor's proposals.

Page 64: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 64 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR Notes: 1. Tests comparable to those specified in this Appendix will be necessary for any equivalent

work, goods or materials proposed by the Contractor (See sub-Clause 105.5).

2. (N) indicates that a UKAS or equivalent accredited laboratory sampling and test report or certificate is required.

3. The Contractor is to submit to the Overseeing Organisation details of his proposed Testing

House together with its UKAS accreditation certificate for approval. Such approval will not be unreasonably withheld.

4. All test results are to be copied direct to the Overseeing Organisation by the Testing House

within 3 days of completion of the test to which they refer. 5. Unless otherwise shown in this Appendix tests for work, goods or materials as scheduled

under any one Clause are required for all such work, goods or materials in the Works. 6. Cube strength tests are not required for concrete complying with Clause 2602. 7. Unless otherwise shown in this Appendix test certificates for work, goods or materials as

scheduled under any one Clause are required for all such work, goods or materials in the Works.

Page 65: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 65 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 100

109 Noise Control Leq and L max As required in

Appendix 1/9

Standard as per

Appendix 1/9

Vibration Control Peak particle

velocity

As required in

Appendix 1/9

Standard as per

Appendix 1/9

Series 300

306 Permanent fencing Quality Management

scheme applies

Concrete

components

Cover to

reinforcement

1 per

consignment

(maximum 1

per 100

components)

(BS1722)

308 Gates and stiles Quality Management

scheme applies

Reinforced

concrete posts

Cover to

reinforcement

1 per

consignment

(maximum 1

per 100

components)

(BS3470)

308 and

311

Preservation of timber Full sapwood

penetration

As required in

sub-Clause

311.2 (v)

Required for

each batch

Quality management

scheme applies

Page 66: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 66 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 400

402 Welding Welding

procedures

(Manufacturer's

tests)

(Every seven

years)

Quality management

scheme applies

Welder

qualification

(Manufacturer's

tests)

As required in

sub-clause

402.6(iii)

Production

testing

(Manufacturer's

tests)

As required in

sub-clause

402.6 (iv))

Welded joints Destructive

testing

Page 67: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 67 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 500

501 Pipes for drainage and service ducts

Product certification scheme applies

Vitrified clay

Concrete - PC/SRC

not exceed-ing 900mm dia

Concrete - Prestressed

Iron-cast

Iron-ductile

PVC-U

GRP

Plastics

See Table 5/1

Corrugated steel (Manufacturer's tests)

Required (AASHTO)

Page 68: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 68 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 500 (continued)

501 Pipes for drainage and service ducts (continued)

Product certification scheme applies

Corrugated steel bitumen protection

not exceed -ing 900 mm dia.

Other materials Required BBA certification (or equivalent) applies

503 Pipe bedding Grading and fines content

1 per 500 tonnes (min of 3)

Required

Water-soluble sulfate (WS) content (N)

5 per source

Oxidisable sulfides (OS) content and total potential sulfate (TPS) content (N)

5 per source

Resistance to fragmentation (N)

1 per source

505 Filter medium backfill Plastic index (N)

1 per source Required

Resistance to fragmentation (N)

1 per source

Water-soluble sulfate (WS) content (N)

5 per source

Oxidisable sulfides (OS) content and total potential sulfate (TPS) content (N)

5 per source

Grading and fines content

1 per 500 tonnes

Page 69: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 69 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 500 (continued)

Permeability

(N)

1 per source

506 Sealing existing

drains

Concrete

Grout

507 Chambers

Precast concrete Product certification

scheme applies

Corrugated

galvanized steel

(Manufacturer's

tests)

Required Product certification

scheme applies

Manhole steps

Steel fitments

Covers, grates

and frames

Product certification

scheme applies

Cover bolts Quality management

scheme applies

508 Gullies and pipe

junction

Product certification

scheme applies

Precast concrete

Clay

Cast iron and

steel

Page 70: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 70 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 500 (continued)

509 Watertightness of

joints

Air test All pipelines

with watertight

joints

Required The Overseeing

Organisation shall be

given the opportunity to

witness all air tests.

513 Permeable backing to earth retaining structures

Plastic index (N)

1 per source Required

Water-soluble sulfate (WS) content (N)

5 per source Required

Oxidisable

sulfides (OS)

content and

total potential

sulfate (TPS)

content (N)

5 per source

Resistance to

fragmentation

(N)

1 per source

Grading 1 per 200

tonnes (min of

3)

Permeability

(N)

1 per source

Precast hollow concrete blocks

(Manufacturer’s tests)

Required

514 Fin Drains (Manufacturer’s tests)

Required BBA certification (or equivalent) applies

Page 71: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 71 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 500 (continued)

515 Narrow filter drains

Geotextiles, pipes and fittings

(Manufacturer’s tests)

Required BBA certification (or equivalent) applies

Granular fill Plastic index (N)

1 per source

Resistance to fragmentation (N)

Water-soluble sulfate (WS) content (N)

5 per source

Oxidisable

sulfides (OS)

content and

total potential

sulfate (TPS)

content (N)

5 per source

Grading and fines content

1 per week (min of 3)

Permeability (N)

1 per source

516 Combined drainage and kerb systems

Load test A minimum of 1 test and not less than 1 test per 1000 m for each type and source

Required Certification that the systems comply with Clause 516 is required

517 Linear drainage systems

Load test A minimum of 1 test and not less than 1 test per 1000 m for each type and source

Required Certification that the systems comply with Clause 517 is required

518 Thermoplastics structured wall pipes and fittings

(Manufacturer’s tests)

Required BBA certification (or equivalent) applies

Page 72: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 72 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 600

601, 631

to 637,

640

Acceptable material Required

Class General

Description

1 General granular fill

Grading/ uniformity coefficient

Twice a week

mc/MCV (N) 2 per 1000m³ up to max of 5 per day

SMC of chalk (N)

Twice a week

1C only

Resistance to fragmentation (N)

Weekly

2 General cohesive

Grading Twice a week Required

fill mc/MCV/PL Undrained shear strength (N)

2 per 1000m³ up to max of 5 per day

SMC of chalk(N)

Twice a week

Bulk density (pfa) (N)

2 per 1000m³ up to max of 5 per day

3 General chalk fill

mc (N) 2 per 1000m³ up to max of 5 per day

SMC (N) Daily

4 Landscape fill

Grading/mc/MCV (N)

Daily

5 Topsoil Grading Daily

6 Selected granular fill

Grading/uniformity coefficient

1 per 400 tonnes

PI/LL(N) Daily

Page 73: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 73 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 600 (continued)

601, 631

to 637,

640

(cont/d)

Acceptable material Required

Class General

Description

6 Selected

granular fill

(continued)

Resistance to

fragmentation

(N)

Weekly for on-

site material

SMC (N) Weekly

omc/mc, mc or

MCV (N)

1 per 400

tonnes

Organic

matter/water

soluble sulfate

(WS) (N)

Weekly

Oxidisable

sulfides (OS)

and total

potential sulfate

(TPS) content

(N)

Weekly

pH/chloride ion

content (N) Weekly

Resistivity (N)

Undrained and

drained shear

parameters (N)

Class General

Description

6F4

and

6F5

Selected

granular fill

Size

designation

and overall

grading

category

1 per week Required

Maximum fines

and oversize

categories

1 per week

Volume stability

of blast furnace

slag

6 monthly

Volume stability

of steel (BOF

and EAF) slag

6 monthly

Other

aggregate

requirements

Annex C of BS

EN 13242

Page 74: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 74 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 600 (continued)

Class General

Description

6F4

and

6F5

Selected

granular fill

(cont/d)

Laboratory dry

density and

optimum water

content

Water content

7 Selected

cohesive fill

Grading/mc/MC

V/bulk

density(N)

1 per 400

tonnes

Required

SMC of chalk

(N)

Twice a week

PI/LL (N) Daily

Organic

matter/water

soluble (WS)

sulfate content

(N)

Twice a week

or daily where

sulfates are

expected

7 Selected

cohesive fill

(continued)

Oxidisable

sulfides (OS)

and total

potential sulfate

(TPS) content

(N)

Twice a week

or daily where

sulfates are

expected

pH/chloride ion

content (N)

Weekly

Resistivity (N)

Undrained and

drained shear

parameters (N)

Permeability

(N)

8 Miscellane

ous fill

mc/MCV (N) Daily

9 Stabilised

materials

Pulverisation 1 per lane

width per 200m

length*

mc/MCV (N)

Bearing ratio

(N)

Page 75: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 75 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 600 (continued)

Pulverised fuel ash Chemical

analysis

1 per

consignment

Furnace bottom ash Grading 1 per 300

tonnes

Fill adjacent to

cementitious material

or metallic items

Water-soluble

sulfate (WS)

content,

oxidisable

sulfides (OS)

content and

total potential

sulfate (TPS)

content (N)

1 per 400

tonnes or per

location if less

than 400

tonnes

602 Earthworks material

beneath surface of a

road or paved central

reserve

Frost heave (N)

Required

(i) Off site source 1 every four months

(ii) On site source As required

609

621

Geotextiles Tensile load 1 per 400 square metres

Required

Permeability

Pore size

612 Compaction of fills Required

Method

compaction

Field dry

density (N)

††

End product

compaction

Optimum mc

(2.5 kg

rammer/

vibrating

hammer

method) (N)

Each class or

sub class of

material

Field dry

density (N)

1 per 400

tonnes

Page 76: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 76 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 700

710 Constituent materials in recycled aggregate

Quality control Checks are to be carried out by the Contractor in accordance with the procedure set down in ‘Quality Control – Production of Recycled Aggregates’ and with those in this Clause.

Required The quality control procedure should be in accordance with the ‘Quality Control – Production of Recycled Aggregates’ published by Waste and Resources Action Programme. This is available from the WRAP website, http://www.wrap.org.uk

The results of all quality control checks shall be delivered promptly to the Overseeing Organisation on request.

Series 800

801, 803, 804, 805, 806

General Requirements for unbound mixtures for adjacent to cement bound materials,

Water-soluble sulphate (WS) content (N)

1 per 400 tonnes or per location if less than 400 tonnes

Required

concrete pavements, structures or products

Oxidisable sulfides (OS) content and total potential sulfate (TPS) content (N)

1 per 400 tonnes or per location if less than 400 tonnes

Unbound mixtures beneath surface of a road or paved central reserve

Frost heave (N) 1 per source Required

Grading and fines content

1 per 400 tonnes

Plastic index (N)

Resistance to fragmentation (N)

6 monthly

Resistance to wear – micro-Deval test

Page 77: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 77 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 800 (continued)

801, 803, 804, 805, 806

Unbound mixtures beneath surface of a road or paved central reserve (continued)

Resistance to freezing and thawing (magnesium sulfate soundness) (N)

1 per source

Water absorption (N)

Volume stability of blast furnace slags

6 monthly

Volume stability of steel (BOF and EAF) slags

6 monthly

CBR (N) 1 per source and then monthly

OMC/mc (N)

Density (N)

Water absorption (N)

Series 900

901, 925,

937, 938,

943

Aggregates for bituminous materials

Required National quality management sector schemes apply

Resistance to

fragmentation

(hardness)

Resistance to

fragmentation

(N)

Monthly

Resistance to

freezing and

thawing

(durability)

Soundness (N) 1 per source

Water absorption (N)

Cleanness Sieve test (mass passing 0.063 mm sieve) (N)

Monthly Washing and sieving method to be used

Shape Flakiness index (N)

Monthly

Page 78: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 78 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

901, 925, 937, 938, 943 (cont.)

Blastfurnace slag Bulk density (N)

1 per 500

tonnes

Soundness (N) Once every 4

months

Dicalcium silicate disintegration (N)

1 per 500

tonnes

Iron disintegration (N)

Steel slag Bulk density 1 per 500 tonnes

Volume stability

(N)

1 per 500 tonnes

Coarse aggregate

for surface

courses

Resistance to polishing (PSV) (N)

1 per source

Resistance to surface abrasion AAV (N)

1 per source

Binders for bituminous materials

Penetration (N) 1 per 750 tonnes

Required National quality management

Softening point (N)

1 per 750 tonnes

sector schemes apply. Modified binders should have a BBA HAPAS

Roads and Bridges Certificate. In the event that no such Certificates have been issued, then in the interim, only modified binders undergoing BBA assessment should be considered for approval by the Overseeing Organisation.

Page 79: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 79 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 900 (continued)

903 to 907, 909 to 912, 914, 916, 925,

Bituminous mixtures Grading (N) For Audit Test purpose only

National quality management sector schemes apply

926, 929 937, 938, 942 943 946 to 948

Binder content (N)

929 Base and Binder Course Macadams

In situ air void content (N)

Required

Refusal air void content (N) (PRD Test)

Binder volume (N)

Grading (N)

Binder content (N)

911 Rolled asphalt surface course (design mix)

Stability value (N)

1 per source Required National quality management sector

Flow value (N) schemes apply

Density (N)

915 Coated chippings Grading (N) 1 per stockpile Required

Binder content (N)

1 per stockpile

Flakiness index (N)

1 per source

Resistance to polishing (PSV) (N)

1 per source

Resistance to surface abrasion AAV (N)

1 per source

Hot sand test (N)

1 per source Not required for coated chippings for surface dressing to Clause 919

Rate of spread (N)

Page 80: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 80 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 900 (continued)

921 Surface macrotexture BS EN 13036-1 Volumetric Patch Technique (N)

BS EN 13036-1 Required

924 High friction surfaces Quality control checks

As required in sub-Clause 924.5

Required BBA HAPAS Roads and Bridges certification (or

System coverage

As required in sub-Clause 924.6

equivalent) applies

Aggregate Resistance to polishing (PSV) (N)

1 per source and as required for coated chippings in Clause 915.3

Required

937 Stone mastic asphalt (SMA) binder course and regulating course

Binder drainage test

In accordance with DD 232:1996

Required National quality management sector schemes apply

942 Thin surface course systems

National quality management sector schemes apply. BBA certification (or equivalent) applies

Binder drainage test

In accordance with DD 232:1996

943 Rolled asphalt surface course (performance -related design mix)

Required National quality management sector schemes apply

Grading (N)

Binder content (N)

Density (N)

Wheel-tracking rate (N)

Wheel-tracking rut depth (N)

Air voids content

Page 81: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 81 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 900 (continued)

920 (con/d)

Bond coats, tack coats and other bituminous sprays

Binder Product identification

1 per product

per source

Required Tests are expected to be repeated every two years

Vialit cohesion 1 per product

per source

Required Tests are expected to be repeated every two years

Accuracy of spread

1 for each

binder and

sprayer per

month

Required Not more than 6 weeks prior to start of work and one per month

Bond coats, tack coats and other bituminous sprays (continued)

Binder

(continued)

Rate of spread 1 per week

Penetration at 25°C and 5°C (N)

Every

manufactured

batch

Manufacturer’s QA test results may be submitted

919 922

Surface dressing National quality management sector scheme applies

Binder Modified binders should have a BBA HAPAS Roads and Bridges Certificate. In the event that no such Certificates have been issued, then in the interim, only modified binders undergoing BBA assessment should be considered for approval by the Overseeing Organisation.

Product identification

1 per product

per source

Required Tests are expected to be repeated every two years

Vialit cohesion (N)

1 per product

per source

Required Tests are expected to be repeated every two years

Page 82: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 82 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 1000

1001

1030

1044

Cement Required Quality management and product certification schemes apply

Portland cement CEM I

Tests and test certificates are required

Portland blastfurnace cement

Blastfurnace cement CEM III/A

Portland pfa cement CEM II/B-V

Pozzolanic cement CEM IV/A

Required (BS 6610)

Portland cement with microsilica

Required BBA Roads and Bridges certificate required for microsilica

Pulverised fuel ash Required Tests and test certificates are required. Product certification schemes apply to pfa and slag

Ground granulated blast furnace slag

Admixtures

Mixing Water Sulfate content (N)

Monthly

Aggregates Resistance to freezing and thawing (magnesium sulfate soundness) (N)

1 per source

Water absorption (N)

Flakiness index (N)

Monthly

Shell content (N)

1 per source

Page 83: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 83 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 1000 (continued)

1001, 1030, 1044 (cont/d)

Aggregates

(continued)

Resistance to fragmentation (N)

6 monthly

Resistance to polishing (PSV) (N)

1 per source

Resistance to abrasion AAV (N)

1 per source

Grading and fines content (N)

1 per week per source

Required

Chloride content (N)

Weekly or as otherwise agreed (1 per source for CBM aggregate)

Total sulfur (TS) and acid-soluble sulfate (AS) content (N)

Every 6 months

Flint coarse aggregate containing white flints

Water absorption (N)

3 per source thereafter weekly

Required

Sand (i.e fine aggregate)

Acid-soluble material (N)

Monthly Not required for CBM aggregate.

Blastfurnace slag Bulk density (N)

Every 6 months

Dicalcium silicate disintegration (N)

Every 6 months

Iron disintegration

Every 6 months

Cement (continued) Required Quality management and product certification schemes apply

Blastfurnace slag (continued)

Total sulfur (TS) and acid-soluble sulfate (AS) content (N)

Every 6 months

Pulverised fuel-ash

Required (BS 3892:Part 2)

Page 84: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 84 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

SERIES 1000 (continued)

1002 1003 1004 1044

Pavement concrete Air content test (N)

As required in Table 10/10

Required Produce certification scheme applies

Density (N) As required in Table 10/10

Strength (N) As required in Table 10/10

1005 Consistence (Workability)

Degree of Compactability (Compaction Index) (N)

As required in Table 10/10

Required

Vebe (N)

Slump (N)

1011 1012

Dowel bars Tie bars

Required (BS 4449)

Product certification scheme applies

Dowel bars and supporting cradles

Load test 1 per arrangement

Sheathed dowel bars

Bond stress 4 bars

Cranked tie bars (coated)

Bend test 4 bars

Salt fog cabinet 4 bars

1015 Joint filler board Weathering test 3 per source Required Normally undertaken by manufacturer

Compression and recovery

4 per source

Extrusion 1 per source

Cork filler board Immersion in water

2 per source

Immersion in acid

2 per source

1016

1017

Applied sealants Required (BS 2499) (BS 5212:Part 1 and BS 5212:Part 2) (BS 4254)

Initial penetration

1 per 1000m or

1 per day

Resilience 1 per 1000m or

1 per day

Page 85: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 85 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 1000 (continued)

1016

1017

(cont/d)

Compression seals Required (ASTM D2628), (BS 2752), (BS 4443:Part 4) Method 10 and BS EN ISO 2440), (BS EN ISO 1856), (BS 903:Part A16 or BS ISO 1817)

Compression set

1 per type of seal

Immersion in oil 1 per type of seal

Self expanding cork seal

Tests specified in Clause 1017

1 per type of seal

1026 1044

Surface macrotexture BS EN 13036-1 Volumetric Patch Technique (N)

1 per day (set of 10)

Required

1027 Aluminised curing compound

Efficiency index 1 per source Required

1030 Wet lean concrete Density As required in Table 10/10

Required

Cube strength (N)

Series 1100

1101 Precast concrete kerbs, channels, edgings

and quadrants

Bending strength

Minimum of 8 per 1000 units of each product (BS EN 1340)

Required

1102 In situ asphalt kerbs Grading 1 test per 500 metres laid*

Required

Binder content

1104 Precast concrete flags

Bending strength

Minimum of 8 per 1000 m²

Required

of each product (BS EN 1339)

Bedding Granular material

Mortar

1107 Concrete block paving

Compressive strength

Minimum of 8 per 1000 m² of each product

(BS EN 1338)

Required

Page 86: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 86 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 1100 (continued)

1108 Clay pavers Bending strength

Minimum of 8 per 1000 m² of each product

(BS EN 1344)

Required

Skid resistance Minimum of 8 per 1000 m² of each product

(BS EN 1344)

Series 1200

1202 Permanent traffic

signs

Required Quality management scheme applies. Certification that the traffic sign is capable of passing the tests in BS 873:Part 1 is required

1207 Anchorage in drilled

holes to supports of

traffic signs

Loading test on site

1210 Holding down bolts

and anchorages to

bases of permanent

bollards

Required Certification that the holding down bolts and anchorages are capable of complying with the performance requirements of BS 873:Part 3 is required

1212 Road markings National quality management sector scheme applies. Procedures are given in BS EN 1824

Tests specified in BS EN 1824

Required

1214 Permanent traffic

cones and cylinders

Required Certification that permanent traffic cones and cylinders have been tested and comply with BS 873:Part 8 is required

Tests specified in BS 873:Part 8

2 of each size

and

category/type

Flat traffic delineators Required Certification that FTDs have been tested and comply with Clause 1214 is required

Tests specified in Clause 1214

Page 87: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 87 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 1200 (continued)

Other traffic delineators

Required Certification that the delineators have been tested and comply with Clause 1214 is required

Tests specified in Appendix 12/4

Temporary cones, cylinders, FTDs and other delineators

Required Certification that at least 1 in 500 of any batch of cones, cylinders, FTDs and other delineators to be used in the Temporary Works have passed the tests in Clause 1214 as appropriate is required

Page 88: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 88 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 1400

1421 Cable Product certification scheme applies

1424 Lighting Units Tests specified in Clause 1424

Each unit Required Product certification scheme applies Certification that the installation complies with BS 7671 (the IEE Wiring Regulations) is required

Networks Tests specified in Clause 1424

Each network Required Certification that the installation complies with BS 7671 (the IEE Wiring Regulations) is required

Series 1700

1702

1704

Cement types as

stated in sub-Clause

1702.1

Required Certificate to be provided monthly for each type of cement.

Quality management

and product certification

schemes apply

Cements (all types) Chloride content

Monthly Tests to be carried out by the manufacturer and results included on the test certificates required above

Pulverised-fuel ash Sulfate content Monthly

Ground granulated

blastfurnace slag

Acid-soluble alkali content

Daily (PC)

Weekly (pfa

ggbs)

Page 89: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 89 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 1700 (continued)

1702

1704

(cont/d)

Aggregates Grading and fines content

1 per week (per source)

Results of routine control tests from the factory production control system operated by the producer to be provided - see Annex H of BS EN 12620.

Product certification scheme applies

Shell content (N)

Monthly

Flakiness index (N)

Monthly

Resistance to fragmentation (N)

Every 6 months

Drying shrinkage (N)

1 per 5 years

Chloride content (N)

1 per week or as otherwise agreed

Sulfate content (N)

Yearly

Blast furnace slag Bulk density (N)

Every 6 months

Stability (N) Every 6 months

Sulfur content (N)

Every 6 months

Water Tests specified in BS EN 1008

Chloride content

Monthly

Sulfate content Monthly

Acid-soluble alkali content

Weekly

Admixtures Chloride content

1 per consignment

Required

(BS 934-2)

Sulfate content 1 per consignment

Required

Acid-soluble alkali content

1 per consignment

1707 Concrete Cube strength (N)

Prestressed concrete - two cubes from 12m³ or 2 batches whichever represents the lesser volume

Required Contractor to cast and test sufficient additional cubes to demonstrate cube strength before transfer †

Page 90: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 90 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 1700 (continued)

1707 Concrete (continued)

Reinforced concrete - two cubes from 24m³ or 4 batches whichever represents the lesser volume

Mass concrete - two cubes from 50m³ or 50 batches whichever represents the lesser volume

Additional cubes for special purposes

Cube strength - identity testing as described in Appendix 17/4 (N)

2 cubes from

each of two

samples of

each batch

Required

Density

Modulus of elasticity

Fresh concrete Consistence (slump or compacting factor or Vebe) (N)

Each batch Required

Air content Each batch

Cement content

Water/cement ratio

1710 Precast concrete

manufactured off Site

Cube strength (Manufacturer's tests)

Contractor to make available records of tests by the manufacturer

Page 91: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 91 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 1700 (continued)

1712 Reinforcement

Steel bars Required (BS 4449)

Product certification scheme applies

Steel wire Required (BS 4482)

Steel fabric Required (BS 4483)

Stainless steel Required (BS 6744)

1713 Fabricated

reinforcement

Required Certification that fabricated reinforcement complies with the routine inspection/testing requirements of BS 8666 is required if the fabrication is not covered by a product certification scheme listed in Appendix B

Page 92: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 92 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 2400

2401 Masonry cement Required (BS 5224)

Quality management scheme applies

Chloride content

Monthly Tests to be carried out by the manufacturer and results included on the test certificate

2402 Sand Required per consignment (BS EN 13139)

Chloride content

Monthly Tests to be carried out by the manufacturer and results included on the test certificate

2403 Water Tests specified in BS EN 1008

2404 Mortar admixtures Required (BS 4887 or BS EN 934-2)

2405 Lime Required (BS EN 459-1)

2406 Bricks

Clay (Soluble salt content Efflorescence Compressive strength Water absorption Initial rate of suction) (BS 3921/TRL Report 447)

Calcium silicate Required (BS 187)

Concrete Required (BS 6073: Part 1)

2407 Blocks

Clay (Soluble salt content Efflorescence Compressive strength Water absorption Initial rate of suction) (BS 3921/TRL Report 447)

Concrete Required (BS 6073: Part 1)

2408 Reconstituted stone

Page 93: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 93 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 2400 (continued)

2410

2411

Stainless Steel

Wire/fabric Required (BS EN 10088-1)

Bars Required (BS 6744)

Ready mixed

mortars

Required (BS 4721)

Mortars Tests specified in Appendix A1 of BS EN 10521-1

1 set of tests

per mix

Series 2600

2601 Bedding mortar

materials

Required for

each batch

Certification in accordance with Clause 2601 is required

Bedding mortar Flow cone test Each batch † Laboratory tests

Flow between glass plates

Compressive strength

Expansion test

Water absorption

Elastic stability 1 per source

Flow cone test Compressive strength

Each load Site control tests

2604 Plastic coating to

fencing posts, gates

and ancillaries

Required (BS

1722: Part 16)

Certification by powder manufacturer and coating applicator is required

2607 Granolithic concrete Testing to be in accordance with Clauses 1702, 1703, 1707 and 1710

Series 3000

3001 General Inspection Reports as required in Appendix 30/1

Page 94: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 94 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR (continued)

Clause Work, Goods or

Material

Test Frequency of

Testing

Test

Certificate

Comments

Series 3000

3005 Grass seeding. Wildflower seeding and turfing

Rate of spread of fertiliser

1 per 1000 square metres*

Rate of spread of seeding

1 per 1000 square metres*

††

Chemical analysis of fertiliser

1 per source*

Grass seed germination and purity (Official Seed Testing Station tests)

1 per source and mix variety*

Required prior to sowing

Page 95: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 95 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/6: SUPPLY AND DELIVERY OF SAMPLES TO THE ENGINEER

Clause Sample Description Frequency of Sampling Delivery Location Comments

915 Pre-coated chippings One sample per 75 tonnes Materials Testing

Laboratory

Boreham Road

Springfield

Chelmsford

Essex

Per source

911 Surface course One sample per 75 tonnes Per source

903,904,

905,906 or

907

Base, Binder Course

and Regulating course

One sample per 100 tonnes Per source

803 or 804 Granular Sub-base One sample per days

delivery

Per source

Notes:

1. The Contractor is to allow in his rates and prices for all costs of sampling which includes the making of cubes and for

delivery to the above locations(s). The Springfield Laboratory will receive samples between the hours of 9.00 am and

4.30 pm Monday to Friday (unless by special arrangement).

2. The sampling is to be entrusted to a suitably trained and experienced person, written proof of qualification from a

laboratory manager or similar to be provided to the Engineer for all sampling staff at least 24 hours before the sampler is

due to commence on site.

3. The sampler shall mark each sample with a unique sample number, date taken and relevant ticket number. A sampling

certificate form, provided by the Engineer, is to be completed in duplicate by the sampler. Copy 1 to accompany the

samples to the laboratory, copy 2 to be delivered to the Engineer on a daily basis. The Contractor may take further

samples from the bulk sample for his own analysis if required.

4. Samples comparable to those specified in this Appendix will be necessary for any equivalent work, goods or materials

proposed by the Contractor (See sub-Clause 105.4).

5. Unless otherwise shown in this Appendix samples of work, goods or materials as scheduled under any one Clause are

required for all such work, goods or materials in the Works.

6. Unless otherwise scheduled under Clause 2602 samples of concrete complying with that Clause are not required.

7. Surface course, base, binder course and regulating course samples shall be delivered to Springfield Laboratory by 9.00

am on the day after the material is laid.

Laying bituminous material is not to commence until the sampler and equipment for sampling are available on site.

Sampling shall be carried out in accordance with BS 598 Part 100: 1987 Method 6.3 (sampling from the material around

the augers of the paver) or as agreed with the Engineer.

Bulk samples are to be reduced on site to provide 2 bagged test sized laboratory samples in accordance with BS 598:

Part 100. The remaining portion is not required unless directed by the Engineer.

All equipment for sampling and reduction shall comply with BS 598: Part 100 and be provided by the Contractor. The

equipment shall include, per sample suitable paper bags, BS Shovel, suitable riffle box, and balance. Rate of spread

trays are required for pre-coated chippings, samples of pre-coated chippings shall not be riffled down but placed in

suitable bags for transportation.

8. Sampling of granular sub-base shall be carried out in accordance with BS 812: Part 102: 1984. Samples shall not

be riffled down but placed in suitable bags for transportation.

Page 96: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 96 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/7: SITE EXTENT AND LIMITATIONS ON USE

1/7.1 Extent of Site

The limits of the Site shall be as shown on the Works Order The Contractor shall note that the areas needed for the erection of advance warning traffic signs are deemed to be part of the Site. There is no requirement for Site Clearance in any area included for such advance traffic signing.

1/7.2 Categories Of Traffic Sensitivity

In the Schedule of Rates, the following categories of Traffic Sensitivity are used: CATEGORY RESTRICTED PERIOD

Work undertaken on the instruction of the Overseeing Organisation

during restricted hours 09.30 - 15.30

Work undertaken on the instruction of the Overseeing Organisation

during night working Monday to Friday 19.00 - 07.00 up to 4

consecutive nights

Work undertaken on the instruction of the Overseeing Organisation

night working Monday to Friday 19.00 - 07.00, 5 consecutive nights

or more

Work undertaken on the instruction of the Overseeing Organisation

Saturday working 07.00 - 19.00

Work undertaken on the instruction of the Overseeing Organisation

Sunday working 07.00 - 19.00

Work undertaken on the instruction of the Overseeing Organisation

on a dual carriageway Saturday working 19.00 - 07.00

Work undertaken on the instruction of the Overseeing Organisation

Sunday working 19.00 - 07.00

NOTE: Designations relate to carriageway works unless otherwise stated, but will include footway works where pedestrians are diverted into the carriageway around the works, or where vehicles are parked in the carriageway adjacent to footway or verge works.

The above restrictions apply to the installation and removal of Traffic Management as well as for the Works The Overseeing Organisation may impose further restriction in the event of special events, seasonal conditions or extra ordinary traffic conditions.

Page 97: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 97 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/8: OPERATIVES FOR THE OVERSEEING ORGANISATION 1/8.1 General a) All operatives shall be equipped with suitable protective clothing and safety

equipment by the Contractor. b) All operatives shall be capable of taking initiative and operating under reduced

supervision after initial instruction. All operatives shall be to the Overseeing Organisation's approval.

1/8.2 Schedule of Operatives

Operative Required

No Total hours for whole contract

Availability Period

Chainman/ Driver

As required by the Overseeing Organisation

Contractor's working hours within the working day.

Possession Date to Completion

Page 98: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 98 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/9: CONTROL OF NOISE AND VIBRATION Noise 1. The Contractor is advised to approach the Local Authority in whose area the work is

to be carried out and agree that the following measures are acceptable to it, as the values given below are given as a guide; however, it is for the Contractor to decide whether to seek the Local Authority’s formal consent to his proposed methods of work and to the steps he proposes in order to minimise noise.

2. The normal working hours within the Site shall be Monday to Friday between 0800 and 1800 hours and Saturday between 0800 and 1300 hours, with no working on public holidays. Exceptionally, consent for work outside these hours may be given after any necessary consultation.14 days notice is required from the Contractor when seeking such consent.

3. The noise levels (See Note (i) below) scheduled below for periods outside the normal working hours will only be permitted when consent has been given to exceptional working.

4. The ambient noise level, Leq (See Note (ii) below) from all sources when measured 2.0m above the ground at noise control stations as defined in paragraph 5 below shall either not exceed the appropriate level given in the Schedule or not exceed by more than 3 dB(A) the existing ambient noise level, Leq (See Note (iii) below) at the control station measured over the same period, whichever level is the greater. The maximum sound level at any noise control station shall not exceed the level given in the Schedule. Exceptionally the Contractor may be given permission to carry out works which exceed the noise levels in the Schedule, provided that 56 days notice of the date and timing of these works is given to the Overseeing Organisation and the Contractor demonstrates that he intends to take all reasonable measures to mitigate the noise nuisance. After consultations with the Local Authority and any other interested bodies a decision will be given within 42 days of receipt of the notice.

5. For the purposes of this Appendix, a noise control station shall be taken as any point adjacent to the Site.

6. If complaints of noise are received, the Contractor shall immediately take all measures necessary to demonstrate to the Overseeing Organisation that the requirements in 5 above are being complied with.

7. The Contractor shall provide the Overseeing Organisation with the results of such monitoring within 24 hours of notification of the complaint.

8. Where the results of any monitoring indicate non-compliance with the limits stated above, the Contractor shall immediately change his method of working, or to alternative plant, or to any combination of both. The Contractor shall further demonstrate that any new arrangements will satisfy the noise limits before fully recommencing operations.

9. The Contractor shall maintain a record of all complaints received with regard to noise and shall promptly notify the Overseeing Organisation of all such complaints.

Page 99: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 99 THURROCK COUNCIL

Period Hours Ambient Noise Level Leq

measured at Control Station:

dB (A)

Period of Hours over which Leq

is applicable

Maximum Sound Level (see Note (iv) below) measured at Control Station

dB (A)

Mondays to Fridays

0700 - 1900 (N)

1900 - 2100

72

62

any 1 hour

any 1 hour

85

70

Saturday 0700 - 1300 (N)

1300 - 2100

72

62

any 1 hour

any 1 hour

85

70

Sunday and Public Holidays

0700 - 0900

0900 - 1700

1700 - 2100

47

62

47

any 1 hour

any 1 hour

any 1 hour

55

70

55

Nights 2100 - 0700 47 any 1 hour 55

All unattended plant outside normal working hours

47 any 1 hour 50

Notes:

(i) Noise levels relate to free field conditions. Where noise Control Stations are located 1m from facades of buildings, the permitted noise levels can be increased by 3dB(A).

(ii) The ambient noise Level, Leq, at a noise Control Station is the total Leq from all the noise sources in the vicinity over the specified period.

(iii) The existing ambient noise level, Leq, at a Control Station is the total Leq from all the noise sources in the vicinity over the specified period prior to the commencement of the Works.

(iv) Maximum sound level is the highest value indicated on the sound level meter which meets the requirements of BS EN 60651 Type 1 or 2 set to SLOW response and frequency weighting A or an integrating – averaging sound level meter to BS EN 60804.

(v) In the Column headed "Hours" (N) represents the normal working hours for the Site.

Page 100: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 100 THURROCK COUNCIL

Vibration (i) a) The Contractor shall ensure that the vibration limits stated below are

complied with. b) Peak particle velocity (ppv) generated by operations on site shall not

exceed 5 .mm/s at the closest point of any building.

(ii) If complaints of vibration within any adjacent property are received then the Contractor shall immediately take all measures necessary, to demonstrate to the Overseeing Organisation, that the requirements of i) above are being complied with

(iii) The Contractor shall provide the Overseeing Organisation with the results of such monitoring within 24 hours of notification of the complaint.

(iv) Where the results of any monitoring indicate non-compliance with the limits stated above, then the Contractor shall immediately change his methods of working, or to alternative plant, or to any combination of both. The Contractor shall further demonstrate that any new arrangements will satisfy the vibration limits before fully recommencing operations.

(v) The Contractor shall maintain a record of all complaints received with regard to vibration and shall promptly notify the Overseeing Organisation of all such complaints

(vi) Particle velocity, as a function of time, shall be measured simultaneously for the x, y and z directions. One direction shall be parallel to the wall of the building.

(vii) In general the requirements of the monitoring system shall comply with BS 7385 Part 1 and shall provide a dynamic range appropriate for "machinery outside" as specified in Table 1.

Page 101: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 101 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/12: SETTING OUT AND EXISTING GROUND LEVELS 1. The information given below will be supplied to the Contractor at the

commencement of the Works. The method of setting out may be related to a system of co-ordinated survey markers, details of which will be supplied to the Contractor, or a list of, or plan showing specific dimensions for line and level. Where co-ordinates of the setting out lines are provided or indicated on the drawings they will be provided at 10m intervals or such other intervals as are necessary for setting out.

2. Specific requirements for setting out Survey and Geometrical information where co-ordinates are provided:-

a. (i) A drawing showing the locations and surveyed values of permanent survey stations and master bench marks which have been established on or adjacent to the Site to enable the lines and levels of the works to be set out will be issued to the Contractor at commencement of Work. As soon as is practicable after taking possession of the Site, the Contractor shall:-

(a) Where permanent Survey Stations or Master Bench Marks are located outside the limits of the Site or public highway, make all necessary arrangements with the appropriate land owners and/or tenants for entry to them and settle all claims arising including payment of any compensation for damage caused to crops and the like.

(b) Immediately take precautions to prevent damage to or the loss of survey stations within the Site. Survey stations marked on hardened areas such as carriageways or footways shall be marked with orange paint and maintained so as to ensure continued visibility and shall not be covered or obscured by materials, rubbish etc. Survey stations consisting of wooden pegs or other markers shall be adequately protected by a barrier.

(c) Check the accuracy of the Survey Stations and Master Bench Marks and immediately notify the Overseeing Organisation of any discrepancies.

(d) Ensure that all Survey Stations are adequately and accurately

referenced to the satisfaction of the Overseeing Organisation.

(e) Provide the Overseeing Organisation with a detailed schedule recording the relevant referencing data, updated as necessary during the progress of the Works. The Contractor shall not disturb or remove any Survey Stations or Master Bench marks except with the prior approval of the Overseeing Organisation, and shall take all necessary precautions to maintain the stability of Survey Stations or Master Bench Marks until such time as they are no longer required.

Page 102: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 102 THURROCK COUNCIL

(ii) The co-ordinates given for the Survey Stations and the horizontal alignment of the works, as shown on the Drawings, are related to a Local Grid and are in grid metres. Ground or true horizontal distances in metres (International) are equal to grid metres.

b. (i) Having taken measures to protect, check and reference the Survey Stations and Master Bench Marks in accordance with sub-clause (a) above, to the satisfaction of the Overseeing Organisation, the Contractor shall carefully establish additional Setting Out Stations and Works Bench Marks, at locations approved by the Overseeing Organisation on or adjacent to the Site, as may be necessary from time to time for the proper setting out of the Works. Such Setting Out Station and Works Bench Marks shall be constructed and protected, to the satisfaction of the Overseeing Organisation, so as to remain stable during the execution of the Works. No established Setting Out Station or Works Bench Marks shall be removed or altered in any way without the prior approval of the Overseeing Organisation. All pegs etc. shall be painted in distinguishing colours as agreed with the Overseeing Organisation.

(ii) The Contractor shall as soon as practicable after the establishment of any Setting Out Station or Works Bench Mark supply the Overseeing Organisation with schedules, in a form to be agreed with the Overseeing Organisation, recording their descriptions, location, reference dimensions, co-ordinate values and/or level, and any other relevant information. Such schedules shall be regularly reviewed and updated by formal notice to the Overseeing Organisation.

(iii) Where Setting Out Stations, referencing stations or Works Bench Marks established outside the limits of the Site, the Contractor shall make any necessary arrangements with the appropriate land owners and/or tenants for, and pay all fees in connection with, the maintenance and location of such stations and Bench Marks and, upon completion of the Works or when directed by the Overseeing Organisation, shall remove them and reinstate the ground to the satisfaction of land owners and tenants.

3 The following colour code shall be used for marking the surface of carriageways

and footways with the locations of underground services and for setting out purposes:-

Gas Yellow markings British Telecom White markings Water Blue markings Highway Authority apparatus or

setting out requirements Orange markings

Electricity Red markings

Page 103: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 103 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/13: PROGRAMME OF WORKS 1. The Contractor shall provide the programme in a form of a network diagram/bar

chart produced as a result of a ‘Critical Path Analysis’ and must abide by the constraints below. It shall show the level of detail appropriate to each stage of the Works and all activities and restraints, each of which shall be given a short title. All events shall be numbered and annotated with earliest and latest event dates.

2. SCHEDULE OF CONSTRAINTS

(I) Work to privately and publicly owned services and supplies (as Appendix

1/16)

(II) The noise and vibration control limits (as Appendix 1/9).

(III) Traffic safety and management including notice requirements (as Appendix 1/17).

(IV) Restrictions arising from the use of substances hazardous to health (as Appendix 1/23).

(V) Provision of environmental protection prior to the main construction operations (environmental barriers, etc).

(VI) Trials and demonstrations in advance of main construction.

(VII) Submission by the Contractor of Road Restraint Systems for acceptance, including awaiting acceptance and resubmission.

(VIII) Requirements to afford archaeological investigation after stripping of topsoil.

3. THE LEVEL OF DETAIL SHOULD BE NOT LESS THAN THE FOLLOWING:

Within 21 days after the issue of the Task Order and any subsequent revision:-

(I) Roadworks – in lengths not exceeding 1.0km for main route and for each side road, link road and slip road.

(a) fencing (e) Subbase

(b) site clearance (f) subgrade improvement layer

(c) topsoil strip (g) base or concrete paving

(d) drainage (pre-earthworks and second stage)

(h) Surfacing

(II) Major privately and publicly owned services and supplies.

(III) Traffic management measures including operation of site accesses, plant crossing and temporary diversions for traffic.

4. The Contractor shall submit a daily return showing in detail all labour and plant, including that of sub-contractors, employed on the site.

Page 104: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 104 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/14: MONTHLY STATEMENTS When the Contractor submits an application for payment in accordance with the Conditions of Contract, it shall, whenever dealing with matters covered by the Schedule of Rates, be set out under Part and Section headings similar to those in the Schedule of Rates and shall separately identify each item and specify quantity, unit, rate and value. Items not described in the Schedule of Rates but appropriate for inclusion as measured work shall be shown at the end of the relevant section or under new section headings as appropriate indicating quantity, unit rate and value. In respect of all other matters referred to in the Conditions of Contract the Contractor shall separately show in the statement quantities, units and rates of good and/or materials and also details of any other matters to which he considers himself entitled. The Contractor shall allow the Overseeing Organisation to inspect invoices for goods or materials included in the statement as may be required. Applications for payment, for each scheme, will as a minimum contain the following information: Application No Application Date VAT registration No. Order No. Name of Officer Ordering the Works Job No Scheme Title Completion Date Measured valuation itemised in accordance with the Schedule of Rates, estimate and any

agreed variations Application Value (excluding VAT) Total of VAT Application total (including VAT) Budget Code (Subjective; Cost Centre; Analysis; Capital; Project) including separate codes for schemes that have been programmed in a composite order Client Project Manager name Exact formatting will be agreed with Project Manager.

Page 105: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 105 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/16: PRIVATELY AND PUBLICLY OWNED SERVICES AND SUPPLIES (i) The Contractor shall make arrangements with the Statutory Undertakers and others

concerned, for the co-ordination of his work with all work which needs to be done by them or their contractors concurrently with the Works.

(ii) The Contractor shall make arrangements with the Statutory Undertakers and others concerned for the phasing of all necessary disconnections and diversions of private services affected by the works.

(iii) Disconnected apparatus can be removed by the Contractor only with the prior consent of the Authority concerned.

(iv) The names, addresses and telephone numbers of the authorities serving in the localitywill be given with the Task Order in the format shown below

Name Address and Tel No Contact

Statutory Undertakers

Other Authorities

Page 106: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 106 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/17: TRAFFIC SAFETY AND MANAGEMENT

DEFINITIONS

(i) Traffic Management System: A Traffic Management System is the method chosen to

direct the traffic around the Works area and shall take the form of lane closure, diversion(s), contra-flow or traffic convoy.

(ii) Traffic Management Operation: A Traffic Management Operation consists of those activities necessary to set up, maintain, alter and remove a Traffic Management System.

(iii) Traffic Management Equipment: Traffic Management Equipment consists of all signs and their covers, cones, cylinders, studs, barriers, road markings and lights including their supports and fixings and any cabling, piping joint connectors, gas/electricity supply or weighting down required for a Traffic Management System.

(iv) Carriageway occupation: Carriageway occupation is the period of time from the start of placing the first cone on the carriageway at the commencement of a taper within a Traffic Management System to the time of removal of the last cone from the carriageway when removing the taper at the end of a Traffic Management System.

TRAFFIC SAFETY AND MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS

(i) The Works require the Contractor to design, set up, maintain, alter and remove Traffic

Management Systems to enable the carrying out of the Works in the sequence and within the constraints set out in Appendix 1/13.

(ii) Traffic Management Systems shall be based on the recommendations of Chapter 8 of the Traffic Signs Manual 2006 published by the Stationery Office, Safety at Streetworks – A Code of Practice published by the Stationery Office and/or Departmental Advice Note TA64 Narrow Lane and Tidal Flow Operations at Road Works on Motorways and Dual Carriageway Trunk Roads with full Width Hard Shoulders. Where the nature of the Works, or the Contractor’s method of working, requires variations to these layouts, the Contractor must submit to the Overseeing Organisation, full details of his proposed variations. Such details must be designed to accord with the recommendations of Chapter 8 for Type A/B works. In accordance with Clause 117.3 the Contractor shall submit the Traffic Management System details three full working days before he intends to bring such proposals into operation

(iii) Where existing road signs, including signs on overhead gantries and road markings, are in conflict with the layout of the Traffic Management system, the Contractor shall cover and uncover all such signs and road markings as and when necessary.

(iv) The Contractor shall not commence any works which require a Traffic Management system until the Traffic Management System is fully operational.

Page 107: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 107 THURROCK COUNCIL

(v) The Contractor shall regularly inspect the Traffic Management System in operation at

the time. Each part of the Traffic Management System shall be inspected at least once in every four hours during the normal working day, and by agreement with the Overseeing Organisation at night and weekends. Any damaged or displaced Traffic Management Equipment shall be immediately reinstated. A written defects sheet together with details of remedial measures taken shall be compiled daily and submitted to the Overseeing Organisation at weekly intervals. When major damage to the Traffic Management System occurs eg. in the event of a traffic accident, the Contractor shall make provision for any additional manpower and resources that may be required In addition to patrolling, any defect in the Traffic Management System reported to the Contractor by either the police or the Overseeing Organisation shall be rectified within 2 hours of that notification. If the Contractor fails to rectify the defect within the two hour period, the Project Manager shall mobilise the Overseeing Organisation’s Emergency Response Service for the area and shall recharge the Contractor accordingly for the time of that visit, even if no work is carried out

(vi) When the Traffic Management systems are not in operation any remaining signs left in position must be securely covered.

(vii) No excavation shall remain unprotected during the times that pedestrian or vehicular traffic is permitted adjacent to that excavation.

The protection shall take the form of linked filled traffic separators or one metre high traffic cones at one metre centres or such other solid barriers that the Contractor may propose as an alternative. The Contractor shall propose a method acceptable to the Overseeing Organisation to fully support the traffic separators, traffic cones or other solid barriers at the edge of the carriageway at a level consistent with the adjacent carriageway surface.

(viii) In the event of poor visibility due to fog or spray from vehicles travelling on the road the Overseeing Organisation may, after consultation with the Police, withhold approval for the Contractor to set up, alter or remove a Traffic Management System, or instruct the Contractor to immediately remove the Traffic Management System until visibility is deemed, by the Police, to have sufficiently improved. In the event of this happening the Contractor shall keep a full record of plant, labour and materials that may be rendered unsuitable by reason of the ordered suspension, and submit them to the Overseeing Organisation within 24 hours. Payment for the suspension will be made unless, in the opinion of the Overseeing Organisation, conditions are such that work could not have been satisfactorily executed in the prevailing weather conditions.

(ix) Unless otherwise agreed by the Overseeing Organisation, a minimum traffic lane width of 3.5m shall be maintained at all times.

(x) Unless otherwise agreed by the Overseeing Organisation, a route through the works shall be maintained for pedestrians at all times. Any temporary footway shall be at least 1.2m wide.

(xi) Unless otherwise agreed by the Overseeing Organisation, pedestrian and vehicular access shall be maintained to all properties fronting the works at all times.

Page 108: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 108 THURROCK COUNCIL

(xii) Entry to and exit from a temporary site

(a) All vehicles shall enter the temporary site as follows:

(1) Where the coned off area is the nearside lane or hard shoulder vehicles shall

enter the safe area behind the cones via the gap labelled ‘works entrance’, from the adjacent lane. They shall then proceed to enter the temporary site at a position appropriate to the work being carried out at the time.

(2) Where the coned off area is the offside lane and central reservation (up to the adjacent crash barrier) vehicles shall enter the safe area behind the cones via the gap labelled ‘works entrance’, from the appropriate adjacent lanes. They shall then proceed to enter the temporary site at a position appropriate to the work being carried out at the time.

(b) Exit from the temporary site to the safe area behind the cones in the “lead out” taper shall be as appropriate to the work being carried out at the time and from there vehicles shall enter the nearside lane and merge with the Main Road traffic.

(c) No vehicles shall stop within the safe area behind the cones in the “lead in” or “lead out” tapers of any Traffic Management System, or the 300m safe area in “lane closure” systems.

(d) All vehicles shall comply with the requirements of this Appendix when entering or leaving a coned-off area.

(e) No vehicles shall enter or leave a coned-off area at any position other than as stated above.

(f) The positions of all works entrances are to conform to the traffic plans.

TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT OPERATIONS

(a) All Traffic Management Operations shall only be carried out by Operatives

experienced in this type of operation.

(b) The Contractor shall appoint a Traffic Safety Officer for each scheme. The Traffic Safety Officer shall be a direct employee (and not a sub-contractor) who shall be entirely responsible for arranging and agreeing Traffic Management Operations, liaison with the Overseeing Organisation and the Police in all matters relating to Traffic Management, the management of traffic during periods of time when traffic restrictions are necessary and ensuring that all traffic management requirements are met, inspection and maintenance of all the Traffic Management equipment and dealing with traffic in emergencies as specified, including notifying the Police immediately of any accidents, emergencies etc. The Contractor shall supply to the Overseeing Organisation and Police, the name and telephone number of the Traffic Safety Officer.

(c) The responsibilities of the Traffic Safety Officer shall also include liaison with the Overseeing Organisation and Police concerning the following matters:

(i) Control of entry and exit to the Traffic Management System. (ii) To notify the Contractor’s Agent and the Overseeing Organisation of any

deterioration of safety precautions, including all Traffic Management

Page 109: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 109 THURROCK COUNCIL

Systems and trafficked road surfaces. (iii) THE CONTRACTOR’S ATTENTION IS DRAWN TO THE NEED TO

ASSESS THE RISKS AND DEVELOP AND OPERATE SAFE WORKING PRACTICES WHEN VEHICLES AND PLANT ARE REVERSING ON SITE, WHETHER OR NOT THEY ARE ON PART OF THE HIGHWAY. RULE 129 OF THE HIGHWAY CODE 1993 IS RELEVANT BUT THE CONTRACTOR’S PRACTICES AND PROCEDURES SHOULD TAKE ACCOUNT OF THE DIFFERENT CONDITIONS, WHICH WILL OBTAIN ON SITE.

(d) Temporary signs forming the Traffic Management Systems shall not be erected

so as to protrude into the carriageway or hard shoulder. They shall be erected within the width of the verge or embankment or cutting slope with a minimum of 600 mm clearance between the edge of the sign and the edge of the running surface or safety fence. When signs are erected within the central reserve they shall not extend or protrude into the carriageway or marginal strip beyond the safety fence.

TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT EQUIPMENT

(a) All signs must be reflectorised and be of Class 1 material to BS 873.

Where mains electricity is used for this purpose all cables and connections must be adequately protected and their positions accurately marked. A maximum of 110 volts supply must be used for this purpose, which must be centre tapped to earth. When gas illumination is used, the gas containers shall be located behind any available barriers or protected by sandbags. The connecting tubes between the containers and lanterns shall also be protected either by an outer covering or by being buried in the ground.

(b) All cones and cylinders within a Traffic Management System shall conform to BS 873: Part 8 to Category A and Designation 2.

(c) During the hours of darkness, lines of temporary fences, barriers etc, must be marked by road danger lamps showing an amber light complying with BS 3143 and Regulation 55 of the Traffic Signs Regulations and General Directions. They must be frequently washed. A steady light must be emitted. Lamps shall be placed midway between successive traffic cones, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Electric lamps shall be placed on stands on additional cones placed inside the line of the barrier. Paraffin lamps shall not be used.

` (d) During prolonged periods of poor visibility, intermittent flashing lamps shall be provided every 50 metres.

(e) All cones and cylinders brought onto site must be provided with new sleeves. They must be frequently washed and any damaged sleeves must be immediately replaced.

Page 110: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 110 THURROCK COUNCIL

(f) All signs must be in good condition, not bent or damaged in any way. They must be frequently washed and maintained.

(g) Generator powered floodlighting towers shall be capable of extension to at least 10 metres above road level. The Contractor shall only employ towers with jacking points for stability and accurate aiming. The towers shall be equipped with sufficient number of adequately rated floodlights to achieve a minimum of 10 Lux at any point on the road surface. Alternatively, the towers may be equipped with conventionally mounted street lighting lanterns with high pressure sodium lamps (max. spacing 30m), to achieve the same minimum lighting levels. The layout and spacing of the towers shall be such that no flood light is mounted

at a tilt of more than 45° to the vertical and must be agreed with the Overseeing Organisation.

(h) Temporary traffic signals shall be powered by sound reduced generators when used in urban areas.

NOTICE REQUIREMENTS

Notice required by the Overseeing Organisation in order to arrange for: (i) amending or making traffic orders .........................................................8 weeks (ii) authorising of non-prescribed signs ...................................................... 3 months (iii) authorising temporary traffic signals ......................................................6 weeks

ROAD CLOSURES

(i) Road Closures and diversion routes shall be arranged by the Overseeing

Organisation (ii) The Contractor shall provide, erect, maintain and subsequently remove, all

signing and barriers etc for road closures and diversion routes.

Page 111: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 111 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/18: TEMPORARY DIVERSIONS FOR TRAFFIC Construction and Geometrical Design Requirements

(i) Highways Open to Vehicles

Description Drawing

No. or Ref.

Construction/Design Requirements

Maintenance Requirements (including timescale for responsibility)

Remarks (including constraints and reinstatement details)

Construction

Major and Minor Roads

Surface Course: 40mm thickness to Clause 910 or 911. Binder Course: 40mm thickness to Clause 905, 906 or 907. Base: 90mm thickness to Clause 903 or 904. Sub-base: 150mm thickness on granular formation; 260mm thickness on clay formation of Type 1 unbound mixtures to Clause 803. Kerbing: 125mm x 255mm precast concrete kerbs with 150mm thick ST 1 concrete to Clause 1001 and 1101 bed and backing.

The contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance and repair of the Temporary Diversion until it has been removed and the land reinstated to its original condition.

The Contractor shall provide for the adequate disposal of surface water. Temporary traffic signs, white lines and reflective studs will be required.

The land on which any Temporary Diversion for traffic is constructed shall be reinstated to its original condition when use of the Temporary Diversion ends.

Page 112: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 112 THURROCK COUNCIL

Construction and Geometrical Design Requirements (continued)

(i) Highways Open to Vehicles

Description Drawing

No. or Ref.

Construction/Design Requirements

Maintenance Requirements (including timescale for responsibility)

Remarks (including constraints and reinstatement details)

Geometric Design

Width of running surface: (a) 7.3m wide minimum or as

existing carriageway if greater than 7.3m wide.

(b) 3.65m wide where single way working is permitted.

(c) Increased width may be required at junctions and on curves.

Minimum Radius of curvature to be 80 metres (inner channel) except at junctions. Visibility to be 140 metres at 1.05m above the road surface. Gradients to be not steeper than 6% (1 in 17). In the case of ramps not steeper than 10% (1 in 10) to accommodate level differences up to 300mm nor steeper than 6.7% (1 in 15) to accommodate differences in level over 300mm. All gradients shall be related to the horizontal. Crossfall to be not steeper than 4% (1 in 25) nor flatter than 2.5% (1 in 40) except at changes of fall. Adverse camber or crossfall will not be permitted.

At the discretion of the Overseeing Organisation kerbing may be omitted if the running width is increased by 1.0 metres and the diversion marked by timber baulks (300mm x 300mm dogged together).

Page 113: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 113 THURROCK COUNCIL

Construction and Geometrical Design Requirements (continued)

(ii) Other Highways and Private Rights of Way

Description Drawing No. or Ref.

Existing Usage

Construction/ Design Requirements

Maintenance Requirements (including timescale for responsibility)

Remarks (including constraints and reinstatement details)

Footways and Cycle Tracks

Construction Surface Course: 25mm thickness to Clause 912. Base: 75mm thickness of Type 1 unbound mixtures to Clause 803. Geometric Design Width of footway to be 1.5m minimum. Gradient to be not steeper than 10% (1 in 10). Crossfall to be not steeper than 3.3% (1 in 30).

Kerbing is not required.

Bridleways Construction

A passageway is to be cleared of all obstructions, levelled and rolled. The surface to be rolled with a minimum of 75mm of hoggin. Geometric Design Width of bridleway to be 2.0m minimum. Clear headroom to be 4.0m minimum across the full width of the bridleway. Gradient to be not steeper than 10% (1 in 10). Crossfall to be suitably sloped or cambered to shed the water.

Kerbing is not required.

Page 114: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 114 THURROCK COUNCIL

Construction and Geometrical Design Requirements (continued)

(ii) Other Highways and Private Rights of Way

Footpaths Construction

A passageway is to be cleared of all obstructions, levelled and rolled. The surface to be rolled with a minimum of 75mm of hoggin. Geometric Design Width of footpath to be 1.0m minimum. Gradient to be not steeper than 17% (1 in 6). Steps to be provided for steeper gradients to the satisfaction of the Overseeing Organisation. Crossfall to be suitably sloped or cambered to shed water.

Private Means of Access

Construction 225mm minimum of Type 1 unbound mixtures to Clause 803 suitably blinded to produce an even running surface free from ruts, potholes, mud and slurry. Geometric Design Width of running surface to be 5 metres or existing width whichever is wider. Gradient to be not steeper than 10% (1 in 10).

Kerbing is not required. Minimum radius of curvature and visibility approved by the Overseeing Organisation.

Note: Particulars of traffic are contained in Appendix 1/17.

Page 115: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 115 THURROCK COUNCIL

(iii) Constraints Details of any constraints will be supplied with the Works Order

Page 116: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 116 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/19: ROUTEING OF VEHICLES (i) Movement of Machinery and Plant Across Public Roads

1. The Contractor shall be restricted from moving excavated material across public

roads unless written authorisation has been obtained through the Overseeing Organisation from the Highway Authority.

2. Any plant crossing shall be set up to meet the requirements of Paragraph 2.3.8 of Chapter 8 of the Traffic Signs Manual as a minimum and to meet the requirements of the Police and the appropriate Highway Authority.

3. Traffic at any crossing shall be controlled by temporary traffic signals complying with the requirements of Appendix 12/5 under manual operation or vehicle actuated. The operator shall be sufficiently competent so as to safeguard both the public traffic and the works traffic.

4. The application for written authorisation shall include 8 No. copies of a 1:500 scale layout with the positions of the signals indicated by a dot and an arrow from the dot indicating the direction of the lights, complete with stage diagram intergreen (all red) timings and a key to the symbols used. The signals shall comply with MCE 0137, modified to operate under manual control only, with high intensity lights. The installed position of the signals shall be accurate to within 2 metres of the position shown on the approved plan. The application shall be submitted at least 6 weeks before the crossing is required for use.

5. The traffic signs configuration shall, as a minimum, be in accordance with Fig. 4.5 of Chapter 8 of the Traffic Signs Manual.

6. The Contractor shall keep the crossing area in a safe condition at all times compatible with the status and use of the road being crossed. Repairs and reinstatement shall be carried out promptly and be subject at all times to the satisfaction of the Overseeing Organisation. A concrete slab 5 metres wide shall be constructed across the existing carriageway to suit existing carriageway levels. On each of the site approaches to a crossing a length of 15 metres of hardcore followed by a length of 10 metres of concrete paving shall be provided. Temporary fencing to restrict entrance and exit widths from the site will be required together with adequate sight lines.

7. The movement of machinery and plant of an isolated nature will be subject to any restriction which the Police may impose. The Contractor shall take such action as is necessary to protect and maintain the surface of the highway crossed by plant.

8. Any written authorisation for plant crossings has a legal limit of six months and will be subject to renewal on written application.

Page 117: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 117 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/21: INFORMATION BOARDS The Contractor shall provide and erect on site Information Boards to drawing no EQ101 The Information Boards shall be erected within five days of the Date for Commencement of the Works at locations to be agreed with the Overseeing Organisation. Within seven days of Completion they shall be removed from the Site.

Page 118: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 118 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/23: RISKS TO HEALTH AND SAFETY FROM MATERIALS OR SUBSTANCES 1/23.1 General In connection with substances hazardous to health the Contractor shall be responsible

for taking all reasonable steps to secure the safety of his employees, members of the Employer's staff or representatives and members of the public through the carrying out of all reasonable steps in connection with:-

1. traffic management measures 2. working practices 3. monitoring This Appendix is included in the Contract because substances that may be hazardous

to health are specified for use in the Works in this contract.

Page 119: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 119 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 1/70: SUSTAINABILITY

1/70.1 General The Contractor shall produce a sustainability plan for the Works which shall be kept

updated as work proceeds. 1/70.2 The sustainability plan shall address all aspects of the work in order to demonstrate

that, as far as is economically possible, the principles of sustainability have been addressed.

Page 120: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 120 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 3/1: FENCING, GATES AND STILES The fencing requirements are shown on Works Order with the following additions and amendments: 1. Permanent Fencing: Wooden Fencing (i) The Contractor shall trim the ground to a regular level on all fence lines.

Page 121: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 121 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 4/1: ROAD RESTRAINT SYSEMS (VEHICLE AND PEDESTRIAN) 1. Location: 1.1 Vehicle Restraint Systems (i) The location, Containment Performance Class and Working Width Class

requirements for safety barriers and transitions will be shown on the Task Order

(ii) The location, Performance Class and Lateral Displacement Zone Class requirements for terminals will be shown on the Task Order

1.2 Pedestrian Restraint Systems (i) The locations and types of pedestrian guardrails will be shown on the Task Order

2.0 Pedestrian Restraint Systems

2.1 Requirements for pedestrian parapets and pedestrian guardrails a) Drawing EH 110 shows details of the pedestrian guardrails. b) Fasteners shall be hot dip spun galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461. c) Holding down bolts and nuts shall be either stainless steel Grade A4-80 to BS EN

ISO 3506-2 or of steel grade 8.8 to BS 3692, hot dip spun galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461.

d) Washers shall be to BS 4320. The metal and treatment should be the same as for

the bolts except that aluminium washers may be used with stainless steel bolts. e) Pedestrian Guardrails shall comply with the following requirements as laid down in

BS 7818:- (i) The loading class of the guardrail shall be Class 2 (ii) The loading class of the infill shall be Class B

Page 122: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 122 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 5/1: DRAINAGE REQUIREMENTS

(i) Schedule of permitted alternative pipe and bedding combinations complying with Clause 503.3.

Pipe Design Groups for permitted alternative pipe and bedding combinations are referred to in the

schedule of Rates for pricing per linear metre ie Series 500 Drainage and service ducts.

Trench Types B, S and Z are referred to in HCD Detail drawing F1

TABLE 1 - PERMITTED ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION : CARRIER DRAINS

TRENCH TYPE

PIPE

DIA

(mm)

PIPE

DESIGN

GROUP

VITRIFIED CLAY PIPES

BS 65 OR BS EN 295

PRECAST CONCRETE

PIPES

BS 5911 : PART 100

ASBESTOS CEMENT

BS 3656

UPVC PIPES

BS 5481

S ES SS L M H L M H

150 S1 B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S S

150 S2 B,S B,S B,S B,S S

225 S1 B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S S

225 S2 B,S B,S B,S B,S S

225 S3 Z Z Z Z Z Z S

300 S1 B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S S

300 S2 B,S B,S B,S B,S S

300 S3 Z Z Z Z Z Z Z

375 S1 B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S S

375 S2 B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S S

375 S3 Z Z Z Z Z Z Z

450 S1 B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S S

450 S2 B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S S

450 S3 Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z

600 S1 B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S S

600 S2 B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S S

600 S3 Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z

Note: 1. UPVC Pipes in sizes up to 400mm may be used provided that the cover to the pipe is greater than 1.0 metre

and less than 7.0 metres.

2. Trench type A may be used as an alternative to Trench Type B or S.

TABLE 2 - PERMITTED ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION : GULLY CONNECTIONS

TRENCH TYPE

PIPE

DIA

(mm)

PIPE

DESIGN

GROUP

VITRIFIED CLAY PIPES

BS 65 OR BS EN 295

UPVC

S,ES or SS BS 4660 BS 5481

150 G 11 Z Z Z

Page 123: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 123 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 5/1: DRAINAGE REQUIREMENTS contd

Notes for Tables 1, 2, 3 & 4

1. For backfilling trenches under existing carriageways CBM3 concrete to S.H.W. Clause 1038 and

Table 10/11 shall be used instead of backfill with Class 1, 2 or 3 general fill and concrete shall

extend 1.0 metre behind the kerb or edge of carriageway. The layer of Class 8 material where

specified shall be retained.

2. For backfilling trenches under new carriageways granular material to S.H.W. Clause 503.3 (i) shall

be used instead of backfill with Class 8 material and Class 1, 2 or 3 general fill material.

3. All precast concrete pipes shall be made to comply with Class .2... precautions as specified in BS

5328: Part 1: 1991 unless otherwise required by the Overseeing Organisation.

4. For Type A trench construction, construction joints are to be formed in the concrete bed to coincide

with the pipe joints with preformed joint filler to S.H.W. Clause 1015.

5. The bore diameter for UPVC pipes shall be as specified or of the nearest larger available size.

6. All pipes other than those used in Trench Construction Type Z shall be flexibly jointed.

SCHEDULE OF CHAMBERS

Chambers shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements stated in the appropriate Item

of the Schedule of Rates and in accordance with the appropriate H.C.D. Drawings Drainage Section

F or Thurrock council; Folio Drawings for Drainage.

Covers and Frames to Chambers and manholes shall comply with the requirements of BS EN

124:1994 and the following schedule:

TBC

Cover

Type

Ref

Cover

Depth

mm

BS EN

124

Grade

Type of Cover and Minimum Clear Opening

(Dimensions in mm)

EC1 150 D400 600 x 600 Clear opening double triangular non-rock

EC2 150 D400 600 x 600 clear opening double triangular non- rock

with approved high security locking bolts

EC3 100 C250 600 x 600 Clear opening double triangular non-rock

EC4 150 D400 675 x 675 clear opening double triangular non- rock

EC5 100 D400 600 dia clear opening non-rock

EC6 100 D400 600 x 600 clear opening double triangular non-rock

EC7 100 D400 750 x 600 clear opening double triangular non-rock

EC8 100 C250 600 x 450 clear opening single seal

EC9 75 B125 600 x 450 clear opening single seal

EC10 100 C250 450 x 450 clear opening single seal

EC11 75 B125 450 X 450 clear opening single seal

EC12 100 C250 450 X 300 clear opening single seal

Page 124: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 124 THURROCK COUNCIL

EC13 100 C250 290 X 275 clear opening single seal

Page 125: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 125 THURROCK COUNCIL

SCHEDULE OF GULLIES

Gullies shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements stated in the appropriate Item of

the Schedule of Rates in accordance with the appropriate H.C.D. Drawings Drainage Section F or

Thurrock Council Folio Drawings for Drainage.

Gratings and frames shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 124:1994 and the following

schedule:

TBC

Grating

Type

Ref

Grating

Depth mm

BS EN

124

Grade

Type of Grating and Minimum Clear Opening

(Dimensions in mm)

EG1 100 D400 430 x 430 Clear opening double triangular non-rock

EG2 100 D400 430 X 370 Clear opening single piece hinged

EG3 100 D400 870 x 380 Clear opening multiple double triangular non-rock

EG4 100 C250 Broxap “Gulligrid” dished footway gully unit

EKG9 200 C250 550 x 450 HB2 kerb type with hinged ductile iron lid, turnbuckle

lock and road retaining bar

EKG10 200 C250 550 x 450 SP Kerb type with hinged ductile iron lid, turnbuckle

lock and road retaining bar

EKG11 250 C250 525 x 125 HB2 kerb type inlet

EKG12 250 C250 525 x 125 SP kerb type inlet

CLEANING OF CHAMBERS, GULLIES AND DRAINS

All chambers, gullies and drains other than filter drains shall be flushed from end to end with water and left

free of obstructions and silt on completion of the whole of the Works in compliance with Clause 509.5.

UPVC TRAFFIC SIGNAL INSPECTION CHAMBERS AND LOOP BOXES

(a) General

In cases where there is the possibility of a vehicle running over the chamber a heavy duty

cover to BS EN124 C250 must be used.

Where steel manhole covers and frames are used to BS EN124 125 they shall be hot dip galvanised in

accordance with BS 729:1971.

Chambers shall be placed on a bed of either a filter material to SHW Clause 505 or a granular material to

SHW Clause 505.3(i) to a depth of 150 mm, surrounded with ST4 concrete to SHW Clause 2602, to a

minimum thickness of 100 mm; and backfilled with a Class 8 suitable material to SHW Clause 601 and

compacted to SHW Clause 612.If mechanical compaction cannot be achieved the void shall be backfilled

with concrete.

The chamber must be kept free of debris, rubble or sand at all times during work on site. If any rubbish

does get into the chamber, it must be removed immediately.

Page 126: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 126 THURROCK COUNCIL

TRAFFIC SIGNAL OR SIGN DEMOUNTABLE CHAMBER

(b) Demountable Chamber Type PT1 for Traffic Signal, lit Traffic Sign or Highmast beacon.

POLETECH Demountable Permanent Underground Base (PUB) made from 15mm thick high density

polymer for traffic signal poles, size 115 mm, complete with welded polymer base plate, cable access hole

and 2 No M10 stainless steel bolts (anti rotational pins) with polymer sleeve cut to size, with 2 No safety

end cap screws. Unit supplied with cable Access Box (Flatpak) size 290x275x480 mm deep in 8 mm thick

high density polyethylene complete with umbilical and galvanised steel frame to BS 729 and 38 tonne

heavy duty steel cover 300 mm square. Product reference code CAB115600PD.

The unit shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers installation procedures. Helpline 01636

611426

(c) Demountable Chamber Type PT2 for non lit Traffic Sign or Highmast beacon.

POLETECH Demountable Permanent Underground Base (PUB) made from 15mm thick high

density polymer for traffic sign posts, size varies, complete with welded polymer base plate, 2 No

M10 stainless steel bolts (anti rotational pins) with polymer sleeve cut to size, with 2 No safety end

cap screws.

The unit shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers installation procedures. Helpline

01636 611426

Manufactured by:

Poletech Systems Ltd Bowbridge Road, Newark, Nottinghamshire, NG24 4EQ

Tel 01636 611426, Fax 01636 73530

ELECTRICAL INSPECTION CHAMBER

UPVC chamber Type EC1 or EC2 constructed in accordance with Folio drawing SD99/05/018

In cases where there is the possibility of a vehicle running over the chamber a heavy duty

cover to BS EN124 C250 must be used.

Chambers shall be placed on a bed of either a filter material to SHW Clause 505 or a granular

material to SHW Clause 505.3(i) to a depth of 150 mm, surrounded with ST4 concrete to SHW

Clause 2602, to a minimum thickness of 100 mm; and backfilled with a Class 8 suitable material to

SHW Clause 601 and compacted to SHW Clause 612.If mechanical compaction cannot be achieved

the void shall be backfilled with concrete.

The chamber must be kept free of debris, rubble or sand at all times during work on site. If any

rubbish does get into the chamber, it must be removed immediately.

Supplier

Cooper Clarke Group PLC

Bloomfield Road

Farnworth

Bolton BL4 9LP

(d) Road Crossings

Chambers should be positioned so that they do not interfere with any pedestrian movement and

should not be sited on any pedestrian ramp.

Page 127: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 127 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 5/2: SERVICE DUCT REQUIREMENTS

1. SERVICE DUCTS FOR ELECTRICAL CABLING TO ROAD LIGHTING COLUMNS,

TRAFFIC SIGNS & BOLLARDS

Permitted alternative pipe/trench options.

Schedule of Permitted Alternative Service Duct Requirements

Table 1 PERMITTED ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION: ELECTRICAL SERVICE DUCTS

DUCT DESIGN GROUP UPVC PIPES

BS 4660 BS 5481

Trench Type Trench Type

ED1 Type A Type A

ED2 Type B Type B

ED3 Z Z

T Z Z

DUCT DESIGN GROUP TRENCH TYPE

ED1

Type A trench for duct as shown on TBC Detail Drg. No.

SD99/05/012

ED2 Type B trench for duct as shown on TBC Detail Drg. No.

SD99/05/012

ED3 Type Z as shown on Highway Construction Details Drg. No. F1.

Concrete bed and surround to SHW Clause 503.3 (iii)

T Trenchless construction by thrust boring.

Thrust Boring of Duct Crossings.

Service cables required to cross the existing carriageway are to be thrust bored on the instructions

of the Overseeing Organisation in accordance with Appendix 5/7. All thrust bores are to be lined

with UPVC ducts or similar materials approved by the Overseeing Organisation. Should any

bore be unsuccessful due to any cause, the Contractor shall form an open trench and make good any

damage done by the boring tool.

The rate for thrust boring is to include for the associated costs of substituting open trenches and

their subsequent reinstatement, in the event of an unsuccessful bore.

2. DUCTING FOR TRAFFIC SIGNALS

(i) GENERAL

The installation of the ducting system shall apply to all traffic signal installations unless otherwise

agreed with the Overseeing Organisation. The system of ducting and chambers for an installation

should be so constructed that any cable can be installed/replaced without the need for any excavations

or civil engineering works.

The location of ducts and chambers should be as shown on the drawings to be supplied to the

Contractor.

If any changes need to be made because of site conditions, they shall be done so in agreement with the

Overseeing Organisation.

Page 128: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 128 THURROCK COUNCIL

Ducts and chambers for traffic signal installations shall be used solely for the signal installation cables

and must not be shared by other utilities.

All ducts and cable draw pits must be installed in accordance with the contract drawings.

(ii) DUCTS

(a) General

All ducts shall be coloured orange (other colours shall not be permitted as each colour has a special

significance and marked with the words "TRAFFIC SIGNALS" along their length at intervals of not more

than one metre. When laid, the wording shall be uppermost. All lengths shall be jointed orsleeved as

recommended by the supplier and/or manufacturer.Polypropylene draw cords, breakweight 5.5kN shall be

provided in each duct; these draw cords shall be continuous over their length with no joints or knots and

shall extend at least one metre from the end of each signal pole cap and/or chamber.

Flexible ducting shall be used between the signal pole and the adjacent chamber.

The end of the ducting shall extend a minimum of 25mm and a maximum of 50mm in to the base of the

controller.

The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 50086-2-4:1994.

(b) Road Crossings

Particular care should be taken to ensure, where possible, that road crossing excavations do not

interfere with

pedestrian crossings and that whenever possible ducts and chambers are routed and sited to avoid areas

of

pedestrian activity.

(c) Footways

A system ducting shall be provided so that all signal posts and the controller are inter-connected by the

duct

network.

Each signal post chamber shall be connected to the duct network by the appropriate size duct laid with

a minimum cover of 450mm.

All ducts shall be laid in a straight line.

(d) Details of Duct Construction

Duct construction shall be as Type SD1 as shown on TBC Drawing

Type Z as shown on HCD Drawing No. F1 for the Duct Design Group Specified.

(e) Schedule of Permitted Alternative Service Duct Requirements

Page 129: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 129 THURROCK COUNCIL

Table 3 PERMITTED ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION: TRAFFIC SIGNAL DUCTS

DUCT DESIGN GROUP UPVC PIPES

BS 4660 BS 5481

TRENCH TYPE TRENCH TYPE

SD1 Type A Type A

SD2 Type B Type B

SD3 Z Z

T Z Z

DUCT DESIGN GROUP TRENCH TYPE

SD1

Type A trench for duct as shown on TBC Detail Drawing

SD2 Type B trench for duct as shown on TBC Detail Drawing

SD99/05/012

SD3 Type Z as shown on Highway Construction Details Drg. No. F1.

Concrete bed and surround to SHW Clause 503.3 (iii)

T Trenchless construction by thrust boring.

(f) Schedule of Minimum Compression Resistance for Ducting

Table 4 COMPRESSION RESISTANCE VALUES

NOMINAL

DIAMETER mm

MINIMUM

COMPRESSION

RESISTANCE

kPA

50 650

100 500

150 450

(iii) INSTALLATION

(a) General

Generally all the ducting system including draw pits should be installed prior to the signal

contractor

arriving on site. However, the signal contractor will be present on site when the poles are

installed to

ensure they are correctly positions and aligned.

(b) Controller

The signal contractor shall also be present to install the controller root/base and the associated

ducts

between the controller and the controller draw pit.

(iv) PERMANENT MARKER BLOCKS

Permanent marker blocks and location posts required for service ducts shall be as shown on HCD

Drawing No. I1 and located where indicated by the Overseeing Organisation.

(v) MANUFACTURERS/SUPPLIERS

Page 130: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 130 THURROCK COUNCIL

The Contractor shall provide a fully ducted service duct system for the installation of traffic signals.

The list below is believed to be a list of manufacturers/suppliers of products in the United

Kingdom, which would comply with the specification.

However, manufacturers/suppliers of equivalent products approved by the Overseeing Organisation, may be used.

(a) COOPER CLARKE GROUP PLC

Bloomfield Road

Farnworth

Bolton BL4 9LP

Tel: No. 01204 862222(b) POET PLASTICS LTD

First Avenue

Bletchley

Milton Keynes

Buckinghamshire

MK1 1DX

Tel:No. 01908 376136

(c) APEX CABLES TRAFFIC DIVISION

Kellaw Road,

Yarm Road Industrial Estate,

Darlington,

County Durham

DL1 4YA

Tel: No. 01325 487272

(d) ARGIVAL PLASTICS LTD

45-49 Cowley Street,

Methil,

Fife

KY8 3QQ

Tel: No. 01592 713801

Or any equivalent manufacturer approved by the Overseeing Organisation.

NOTES

1. For backfilling trenches under existing carriageways CBM3 concrete to S.H.W. Clause

1038 and Table 10/11 shall be used instead of backfill with Class 1,2 and 3 general fill and

the concrete shall extend 1 metre behind the kerb or edge of carriageway. The layer of

Class 8 material where specified shall be retained.

2. For backfilling trenches under new carriageways granular sub-base material Type 1 to

S.H.W. Clause 804 shall be used instead of backfill with Class 8 material and Class 1,2 or 3

general fill material.

3. All pipes other than those used in Trench Construction Type Z shall be flexibly jointed.

4. UPVC ducts to be provided for a Statutory Authority shall be supplied in the following

colours:-

Page 131: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 131 THURROCK COUNCIL

(a) for the Water Company - Blue

(b) for British Telecom - Grey

(c) for British Gas - Yellow

(d) for Eastern Electricity - Black for low voltage cables,

red for high voltage cables

(e) for Street Lighting cables and

cables for illuminated signs - Orange

(f) for Traffic signal installation cables- Orange (marked TRAFFIC SIGNAL)

(g) for Mercury Communications - White

(h) for Cable Television Companies - Green.

Page 132: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 132 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 5/5: COMBINED DRAINAGE AND KERB SYSTEMS 1. The locations of Combined Drainage and Kerb Systems are shown on the Works Order

The details of Combined Drainage and Kerb Systems are shown on Drawings Nos. EF110, EF111 and EF112. The details of Drainage Channels are shown on Drawing No. EF127

2. Limiting dimensions:

(i) Maximum width and depth of units.The maximum width of the units shall be 430mm and the maximum depth shall be 560mm.

(ii) Kerb upstand. The Kerb upstand between the finished carriageway channel level and the top of the top block shall be 125mm.

(iii) Kerb profile. The kerb profile shall be as detailed on Drawing No. EF110.

3. Strength requirements. Units shall be Class D.

4. Hydraulic design parameters. Storm frequency: Once per year. Time of Entry : 4-8 minutes

5. Class of concrete or mortar bedding/surround. (a) For Combined Drainage and Kerb Blocks.

Concrete bedding/surround for top and Base Block and Base Block and Cover Plate shall be ST 1. For Base Block and Cover Plate under carriageway concrete bedding/surround shall be ST 4. Mortar bedding shall be to designation (i) in the SHW 2400 Series. (b) For Drainage Channels. Concrete bedding/surround for Base Block to Drainage Channel shall be grade C30. Mortar joint between Base Block and Channel Grating shall be epoxy mortar.

6. Requirements for Combined Drainage and Kerb Blocks.

(i) TOP AND BASE BLOCKS

1. All blocks shall be of precast concrete as supplied by Marshalls, Head Office, Southowram, Halifax, West Yorkshire, or equivalent.

2. Standard Top and Base Blocks shall comply with. Clause 516 and Drawing No. EF110.

3. Types of Blocks shall be appropriate to the respective horizontal curve radii as follows:

Page 133: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 133 THURROCK COUNCIL

Radius (m) Type of Block

∞ > 50 Standard 50.0-19.1 50/20 19.0-10.8 19/11 10.7-7.7 10/8 7.6-6.0 7/6

Right angle 90°

(ii) COVER PLATES

1. Cover Plates shall be manufactured from 12.5mm thick grade 43A1 mild steel. Dimensions shall be appropriate to the horizontal curve radii as shown on the Task Order. On straight lengths, Plates longer than 500mm may be permitted (max 2 metres) subject to the Overseeing Organisation’s approval.

2. Cover Plates shall be hot-dip galvanised in accordance with BS 729 and shall be suitably protected before and during installation in order that the protective coating is not damaged. Where cutting is necessary, one or two Plates shall be cut so that no single Plate is less than 250mm. Cut or damaged Plates shall be renovated using DefconZ, or equivalent in accordance with BS 729, Appendix D.

(iii) COVER PLATE JOINTING TAPE

1. Cover Plate jointing tape shall be Denso Tape, or equivalent, min 50mm wide.

(iv) CABLE DUCT BLOCKS

1. Cable Duct Blocks shall be of a polymer concrete as supplied by Marshalls or equivalent.

(v) OUTFALLS, SILT TRAPS AND ACCESS COVERS

1. Covers and frames shall be cast iron as supplied by Marshalls or equivalent and shall be used in all Outfalls, Silt Traps and Access Covers unless otherwise specified in the Contract or agreed by the Overseeing Organisation.

(vi) STOP ENDS

1. Stop Ends shall be built using Class B engineering bricks and designation (i) mortar with in situ concrete surround.

(vii) VERTICAL JOINT SEALANT

1. Vertical joint sealant shall be Marshalls M-Seal Bituminous Mastic or equivalent.

(viii) CONSTRUCTION

1. Excavations shall be carried out as necessary to permit installation of the Blocks. Where Base Blocks and Cover Plates are to be installed beneath new pavements, the pavement shall be completed to top of roadbase level before excavation for the Blocks is commenced.

Page 134: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 134 THURROCK COUNCIL

2. Base Blocks, Outfalls, Junctions and Bends shall be laid to correspond to carriageway channel levels or where beneath the carriageway, shall be laid to a straight grade. Blocks shall be bedded directly onto a freshly mixed concrete foundation or alternatively bedded on a layer of designation (i) mortar not less than 10mm and not more than 40mm thick on a previously prepared concrete foundation. Unless otherwise agreed by the Overseeing Organisation, Base Blocks shall be laid commencing at the outfall with adjacent invert levels corresponding and a complete line of Base Blocks between Junctions/Access Cover/Stop Ends shall be approved by the Overseeing Organisation before installation of the Top Blocks or Cover Plates.

3. Jointing between adjacent Base Blocks, Outfalls, Junctions and Bends shall be effected by applying sufficient vertical joints sealant onto one or both faces of the joint in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, and drawing or tamping the adjacent Block to make a watertight joint. The maximum thickness of compressed sealant shall be 8mm, with a minimum spread through the joint. Surplus sealant shall be removed from the inner surface of the Blocks as work proceeds.

4. Top Blocks shall be laid commencing at the outfall, firmly bedded on the Base Blocks using designation (i) mortar. The whole of the joint shall be completely filled with compacted mortar and the joint shall be pointed both inside and out. Surplus mortar shall be removed from inside the Blocks as work proceeds. Top Blocks shall be close jointed with adjacent top and front faces corresponding and any unit deviating more than 3mm in 3m from line or level shall be made good by lifting and relaying.

5. Where cutting is necessary, one or two Blocks shall be cut so that no single Block is less than 250mm in length. All cutting and trimming of the units shall be carried out with a concrete saw or disc cutter. Base Block Junctions and Outfalls shall not be cut unless directed by the Overseeing Organisation. Any cut top Blocks shall be laid with a drainage opening away from the carriageway and shall be protected to prevent backing concrete entering the Combined Drainage and Kerb Block System.

6. Cover Plates shall be bedded on designation (i) mortar and surplus material shall be removed from within the Base Blocks as work proceeds. Cover Plates and Cover Plate Bends shall be close jointed and sealed with Cover Plate jointing tape, in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, immediately a length has been approved.

7. Where necessary, Top Block drainage openings shall be protected against the ingress of joint filler, sealant and concrete by covering with a 250mm length of 3M (Scotch) Waterproof Cloth No. Y387 Tape 150m,m wide (with 3M No. 83 primer) or equivalent or other method to be agreed by the Overseeing Organisation.

8. Outfalls, Silt Traps and Access covers shall be constructed using the appropriate type of Base Block as specified in the Contract. The Block shall be bedded on sufficient designation (i) mortar over a gully pot or vertical pipe, where specified, to make a watertight joint. Where necessary, in situ smooth concrete benching shall be shaped to the full depth of the Base Block. In Silt Traps, the pipe shall be bedded into ST 4 concrete which shall be fully compacted to make a watertight seal.

Page 135: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 135 THURROCK COUNCIL

9. Cable Duct Blocks shall be bedded on designation (i) mortar.

10. In situ concrete haunching or surround shall not be placed until the installed units have been inspected and approved by the Overseeing Organisation. The haunching/surrounding shall be carried out as one operation to complete lines of top and Base Blocks or Base Blocks and Cover Plates. Any areas of overdig which cannot be filled with acceptable material and adequately compacted by mechanical means shall be backfilled with ST 4 concrete. The top of the concrete surround for Base Blocks and Cover Plates under new carriageways, shall be finished level with the top of roadbase. Construction plant or vehicles crossing the Blocks shall be suitable in relation to the thickness of concrete cover so that damage is not caused to the Blocks, Cover Plates, concrete bedding or concrete surround. Methods of protection for heavy axle loading shall be agreed by the Overseeing Organisation.

11. Base Blocks, Outfalls, Junctions or Bends not covered by fully bedded Top Blocks, Cover Plates or Combined Drainage and Kerb Block type covers and frames, shall be adequately supported against loadings imposed by construction traffic. Methods of protection shall be agreed by the Overseeing Organisation.

12. Where flexible surfacing is laid less than 125mm below the top of the Top Block, it shall be cut and shaped after rolling when partially cooled at each top Block drainage opening to form a smooth chamfer.

13. On completion of the works, the Combined Drainage and Kerb Block system shall be, unless otherwise agreed by the Overseeing Organisation, cleaned out by high pressure water jetting (1500-2200 p.s.i. @ 45 gal/min minimum) and left free from obstruction and all Outfalls, Silt Traps and Catchpits shall be emptied. The cleaning process shall be repeated where necessary after the completion of any remedial works.

7. Requirements for Drainage Channels

(i) BASE BLOCKS

1. All Blocks shall be of precast concrete as supplied by Marshalls, Head Office, Southowram, Halifax, West Yorkshire, or equivalent.

2. Base Blocks shall comply with. Clause 516 and Drawing No. EF 127.

3. Types of Blocks shall be appropriate to the respective horizontal curve radii as follows: Radius (m) Type of Block

∞ > 50 Standard 50.0-19.1 50/20 19.0-10.8 19/11 10.7-7.7 10/8 7.6-6.0 7/6

Page 136: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 136 THURROCK COUNCIL

(ii) CHANNEL GRATINGS

1. Channel gratings shall be non-rocking. Max-E-channel type gratings shall be cast iron appropriate to the traffic loading.

(iii) OUTFALLS, SILT TRAPS AND ACCESS COVERS

1. Covers and frames shall be cast iron as supplied by Marshalls or equivalent and shall be used in all Outfalls, Silt Traps and Access Covers unless otherwise specified in the Contract or agreed by the Overseeing Organisation.

(iv) STOP ENDS

1. Stop Ends shall be built using Class B engineering bricks and designation (i) mortar with in situ concrete surround.

(v) VERTICAL JOINT SEALANT

1. Vertical joint sealant shall be Aquaseal 88 mastic or equivalent.

(vi) CONSTRUCTION

1. Excavations shall be carried out as necessary to permit installation of the Blocks and Gratings.

2. Base Blocks, Outfalls, Junctions and Bends shall be laid to correspond to carriageway levels. Blocks shall be bedded directly onto a freshly mixed concrete foundation or alternatively bedded on a layer of designation (i) mortar not less than 10mm and not more than 40mm thick on a previously prepared concrete foundation. Unless otherwise agreed by the Overseeing Organisation, Base Blocks shall be laid commencing at the Outfall with adjacent invert levels corresponding and a complete line of Base Blocks between Junctions/Access Covers/Stop Ends shall be approved by the Overseeing Organisation before installation of the Top Blocks or Cover Plates.

3. Jointing between adjacent Base Blocks, Outfalls, Junctions and Bends shall be effected by applying sufficient vertical joints sealant onto one or both faces of the joint in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, and drawing or tamping the adjacent Block to make a watertight joint. The maximum thickness of compressed sealant shall be 8mm, with a minimum spread through the joint. Surplus sealant shall be removed from the inner surface of the Blocks as work proceeds.

4. Channel Gratings shall be laid commencing at the outfall, firmly bedded on the Base Blocks using epoxy mortar. The whole of the joint shall be completely filled with compacted mortar and the joints shall be pointed both inside and out and within the cast iron Grating Slots. Surplus mortar shall be removed from inside the units as work proceeds. Gratings shall be close jointed with adjacent top and front faces corresponding and any unit deviating more than 3mm in 3m from line or level shall be made good by lifting and relaying.

Page 137: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 137 THURROCK COUNCIL

5. Where cutting is necessary, one or two units shall be cut so that no single unit is less than 250mm in length. All cutting and trimming of the units, other than cast iron Gratings, shall be carried out with a concrete saw or disc cutter. Base Block Junctions and Outfalls shall not be cut unless directed by the Overseeing Organisation.

6. Outfalls, Silt Traps and Access Covers shall be constructed using the appropriate type of Base Block as specified in the Contract. The Block shall be bedded on sufficient designation (i) mortar over a gully pot or vertical pipe, where specified, to make a watertight joint. Where necessary, in situ smooth concrete benching shall be shaped to the full depth of the Base Block. In Silt Traps, the pipe shall be bedded into ST 4 concrete which shall be fully compacted to make a watertight seal.

7. In situ concrete haunching or surround shall not be placed until the installed units have been inspected and approved by the Overseeing Organisation. The haunching/surrounding shall be carried out as one operation to complete lines of Base Blocks and Gratings. Any areas of overdig which cannot be filled with acceptable material and adequately compacted by mechanical means shall be backfilled with Grade C30 concrete. Construction plant or vehicles crossing the Blocks shall be suitable in relation to the thickness of concrete cover so that damage is not caused to the Blocks, bedding or concrete surround. Methods of protection for heavy axle loading shall be agreed by the Overseeing Organisation.

8. Base Blocks, Outfalls, Junctions or Bends not covered by fully bedded Grating covers and frames, shall be adequately supported against loadings imposed by construction traffic. Method of protection shall be agreed by the Overseeing Organisation.

9. On completion of the works, the Drainage channel system shall be, unless otherwise agreed by the Overseeing Organisation, cleaned out by high pressure water jettng (1500-2200 p.s.i. @ 45 gal/min minimum) and left free from obstruction and all Outfalls, Silt Traps and Catchpits shall be emptied. The cleaning process shall be repeated where necessary after the completion of any remedial works.

Page 138: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 158 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 5/70: CONNECTIONS TO PUBLIC SEWERS

1. Connections to Public sewers (foul or surface water) shall be made by the “junction insertion” technique and shall be to the approval of the Sewerage Authority (Anglian Water Services Limited within the area of Essex served by this Authority).

2. The inserted junction shall be connected to the foul or surface water sewer by flexible

couplings complying with Water Industry Specification WIS No.4-41-01 as manufactured by Flex-Seal Couplings Limited or equivalent.

3. Anglian Water Services shall on the relevant Form be given three weeks’ notice of

intent to connect to the public (surface water or foul) sewer under Section 106 of the Water Industry Act 1991, for inspection and approval of the joints.

4. The Contractor’s attention is specifically drawn to Clause 171 AR and the Code of Practice for Safety in Sewers and Sewage Works published by the Institution of Civil Engineers. The Contractor must provide all equipment necessary, and ensure that all his work people comply with the recommendations of the Code of Practice when working on, in or adjacent to Sewers.

Page 139: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 159 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 6/1: REQUIREMENTS FOR ACCEPTABILITY AND TESTING ETC OF EARTHWORKS MATERIALS 6/1.1 General

(a) Excavated material from existing filter drains may be used in areas of fill providing that the criteria given in Table 6/1 and the flowing criteria:

General

Material

Description

Property Acceptable Limits

Within:-

LOWER UPPER

1A Well graded

granular

material

(iii) mc

(iv) MCV

omc -4%

8

omc +2%

14

1B Uniformly

graded

granular

material

(iii) mc

(iv) MCV

omc -4%

8

omc +2%

14

2A Wet cohesive

material

(iii) mc

(iv) MCV (LL below

50%)

(iv) MCV (LL above

50%)

9

10

PL +2%

15

16

2B Dry cohesive

material

(iii) mc

(iv) MCV

omc -4%

8

omc +2%

14

2C Stony

cohesive

material

(iii) mc

(iv) MCV

omc -4%

8

omc +2%

14

2D Silty cohesive

material

(ii) mc

(iii) MCV

omc -4%

8

omc +2%

15

3 Chalk (i) mc

(ii) SMC

To be agreed with the

Engineer

To be agreed with the

Engineer

4 Fill to

landscape

areas

(i) grading

(ii) mc

(iii) MCV

To be agreed with the

Engineer

To be agreed with the

Engineer

To be agreed with the

Engineer

6C Selected

Uniformly

graded

granular

material

(c) mc omc -2% omc +1%

Page 140: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 160 THURROCK COUNCIL

6F2 Selected

granular

material

(coarse

grading)

10% fines value 50KN

8 Class 1, Class

2 or Class 3

material

(i) mc

(ii) MCV

omc -2%

8

omc +2%

14

Note: Where stated above for Class 3 and Class 4 materials that Acceptable Limits are to be agreed with

the Overseeing Organisation the limits shall be agreed prior to commencement of any works

with those materials.

(b) Trial holes in any material other than hard material shall include separating

materials during excavation, backfilling with acceptable material and its compaction and finishing with 150 mm of top soil as the adjacent area dictates.

(c) Trial holes in hard material shall include reinstatement of the hole with

materials and thicknesses to be compatible with adjacent construction materials.

6/1.2 Requirements for Acceptability & Testing etc. of Earthworks Materials

Classes of Acceptable Material (a) Acceptable material for use as general fill shall comply with the requirements

for Classes 1A and 1B of Table 6/1 and the additional requirements of this Appendix. It shall not contain any unacceptable material as defined in Clause 601.

(b) Notwithstanding the requirements of Table 6/2 up to 5 per cent of the material

may be made up of isolated boulders not exceeding 15 dm3 in size provided that the fill can be compacted in the manner specified in Clause 612.

(c) The moisture content of the material shall be within the range:

(i) Class 1A Lower : Optimum MC -4% Upper : Optimum MC +2%

(ii) Class 1B Lower : Optimum MC -3% Upper : Optimum MC +1%

(d) The Contractor's responsibility for testing is detailed in Appendix 1/5. (e) Chalk which has a Saturation Moisture Content in excess of 20% is designated

as Class 3.

Page 141: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 161 THURROCK COUNCIL

6/1.3 Special Requirements for Determining Acceptability (a) Earthworks classification will be made by the Overseeing Organisation in areas

of cut. (i) If, in the opinion of the Overseeing Organisation any material has

altered its classification or become unacceptable for whatever reason, the Overseeing Organisation may require the classification and acceptability tests to be repeated.

(ii) Sampling of materials by the Contractor for earthworks classification

testing will normally be undertaken in conjunction with the Overseeing Organisation. The Overseeing Organisation will be notified of the intention to sample at least 1 hour in advance, at which time the Overseeing Organisation may give approval for sole sampling by the Contractor.

(b) Earthworks classification will be made by the Overseeing Organisation at the

point of excavation for on-site materials, or at the point of deposition for imported materials.

6/1.4 The Rapid Assessment Procedure for Material Acceptability The rapid assessment procedure for determining the acceptability of materials, in

accordance with BS 1377:Part 4, may be used at the discretion of the Overseeing Organisation.

Page 142: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 162 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 6/3: REQUIREMENTS FOR EXCAVATION, DEPOSITION, COMPACTION (OTHER THAN DYNAMIC COMPACTION) 1. The earthworks requirements shall be as shown on the Works Order.

2. Blasting for excavation:-

(i) Blasting is not a permitted alternative to normal excavation methods.

3. Cutting faces

a) Open trench excavations for pipe installations at the toe of slopes shall not

exceed 10.0m in any one continuous length. A minimum of a 10.0m length shall be left unopened between lengths of opened trench.

b) For faces of cuttings prior to topsoiling, isolated patches of soft, fragmented or

insecure material will be excavated and filled by well ramming in a Class of fill with similar characteristics to the surrounding intact material.

4. Watercourses including ditches etc:-

Details of new or modifying old watercourses shall be as shown on the Works Order.

5. Embankment Construction:-

a) The Contractor will not be permitted either to oversteepen a batter by more than

10% steeper than the specified permanent slope batter or widen an embankment

by more than H/5 (where H = embankment height) either to permit adequate

compaction of the edges before trimming back or to obtain the final profile following any settlement of the fill.

b) For those sections of embankment where the Contractor chooses not to lay the

full thickness of capping (or sub-base where there is no capping) immediately after forming the sub-formation (or formation where there is no capping), an additional 300mm minimum compacted thickness of material of the same composition as the sub-formation (or formation where there is no capping), will be placed above sub-formation level (or formation level where there is no capping), as a weather protection layer.

6. Compaction:-

a) For End-product compaction, the Contractor will be permitted to use nuclear

methods to determine field dry density provided that he can demonstrate at a site trial in advance of the main earthworks, to the Overseeing Organisation's satisfaction, that correlations with the standard test (B.S. 1377:Part 9) are valid and repeatable for all Classes of material for which the Contractor proposes to use nuclear gauges for testing in the Contract.

b) The frequency of testing of field dry density shall be as shown in Appendix 1/5.

Page 143: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 163 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 6/4: REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 3 MATERIAL Periods when earthworks involving Class 3 Material shall not be carried out

Earthworks involving Class 3 material shall not be carried out between 1 November and 31 March. In the event of suitable weather conditions occurring during this period, the Overseeing Organisation may permit a relaxation of these dates on a day-to-day basis.

Page 144: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 164 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 6/5: GEOTEXTILES USED TO SEPARATE EARTHWORKS MATERIALS

a) Geotextiles for separation layers shall be as shown on the Works Order b) The material used for separation layers shall be Terram 1000 or equivalent

polymer based non-woven fabric. c) The geotextile shall have a life expectancy of 10 years. d) The Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance is required for each batch. Samples

shall be supplied by the Contractor up to a maximum of 5 samples. e) The area upon which the membrane is to be laid shall be rolled by one pass of a

smooth wheeled roller having a mass per metre width of roll of not less than 700 kg.

f) Where lapping is employed adjacent sheets shall be overlapped by not less than

300mm or by such greater figure recommended by the manufacturer. g) Test pieces and samples shall be retained by the Contractor until the end of the

Period of Maintenance when they shall be delivered to the Overseeing Organisation.

h) The number of tests on samples shall be as described in Appendix 1/5

Page 145: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 165 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 6/7: SUB-FORMATION AND CAPPING AND PREPARATION AND SURFACE TREATMENT OF FORMATION 6/7.1 General

a) Capping shall be provided as required by the contract

6/7.2 Surface Level Tolerance

a) The surface level of starter layers shall have a tolerance within +20mm and -30mm relative to the design level.

6/7.3 Class of Material

a) Capping will be Class 6F1 or 6F2 excluding chalk. b) The material will comply with Tables 6/1 and 6/2 with the following additional

requirements: i) the material will have a 10% Fines Value of 50kN or more when tested in

accordance with B.S. 812 except that samples will be soaked in water at room temperature for 48 hours before testing without having been oven dried.

ii) the material will achieve a minimum CBR of 30% when tested in

accordance with B.S. 1377, Part 4, Clause 7, when compacted to a dry density of 95% of the maximum achieved by B.S. 1377, Part 4 Clause 3.7, using three annular surcharge rings.

iii) sub-base material complying with Clause 804 will be deemed to satisfy the

requirements of sub-clauses (i) and (ii) above. 6/7.4..Capping Construction a) Construction of the capping layer shall be in accordance with Clauses 613.11(i) in

cuttings and 613.12(i) on embankments. 6/7.5 Method Statement and Demonstration Area

When required by the Overseeing Organisation, at least 4 weeks before the laying of the material the Contractor shall submit to the Overseeing Organisation a Method Statement

together with the material sources. The first 700 m2 of capping construction shall be considered a demonstration area in accordance with Clause 613 and shall only remain as part of the Permanent Works if fully meeting the requirements of the Contract.

Page 146: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 166 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 6/8: TOPSOILING 1. Imported topsoil Class 5B is required at the following locations:

On the instructions of the Overseeing Organisation.

2. All locations shall receive Treatment I. Hydraulic mulch seeding is not permitted.

3. The thickness of topsoil to be deposited shall be as shown on the drawings and shall

generally be 150 mm.

4. There are no areas of cutting slopes which need harrowing.

5. The rate of distribution of seed shall be 20g/m2.

6. All areas of grass shall be mown in accordance with Clause 618.10.

7. Mowing plant Shall be agreed with the Overseeing Organisation.

8. Seed mixture requirements shall comply with Table 6/5S and shall be spread at locations

shown on the drawings.

Page 147: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 167 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 7/1: SHEET 1

PERMITTED PAVEMENT OPTIONS - FLEXIBLE, FLEXIBLE COMPOSITE AND

SURFACING FOR RIGID COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION

1. Location. The location of the site will be given by the Engineer.

2. Grid for checking surface levels of pavement courses (Clause 702.4) Longitudinal dimension: 10m

Transverse dimension : 2m

3. Surface regularity (Clause 702.7) Category of Road: Category A forClass A roads Category B for all other roads.

4. Coated chippings: Nominal Size: 20

Minimum PSV: 60 unless otherwise stated in the Schedule of Rates

Maximum AAV: 10

5. Measurement of Surface Texture to Clause 921 No

6. Are longitudinal construction joints to cement-bound roadbase in

flexible composite construction to comply with Clause 1042 No

7. Requirements for hardness, durability and cleanness of aggregates shall comply with sub-Clause 901.2.

8. Requirements for regulating courses shall comply with Clause 907.

Clause Material Grade

of

Binder

Thickness

(mm)

Special Requirements

Surfacing Surface

Course

911 Rolled

Asphalt

Surface

Course

(Design Mix)

50 pen 40 SS 594: Part 1: 2005 Table No:

3

Column No: 3/3

Marshall Stability Range 4-8

kN or 6 to 10kN

Marshall Flow: not more than

5mm for stabilities up to 8 kN

and not more than 7mm for

stabilities in excess of 8 kN.

Aggregate Types:

As Clause 4 of BS 594:

Part 1: 2005 sub-paragraph (a)

with

minimum PSV of 45 but

excluding

limestone, or sub-paragraph (c)

with a minimum PSV of 50.

Maximum AAV: 14

Laying of Surface course to

comply

with the requirements of

Clause 708.

Page 148: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 168 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 7/1: SHEET 1

Clause Material Grade

of

Binder

Thickness

(mm)

Special Requirements

Binder Course 905 Rolled

Asphalt

Binder

Course

50 pen

bitume

n

50 to 60 BS 594: Part 1: 2005, Table 2

Column No. 2/2, 2/3 or 2/4

Aggregate Types:

As Clause 2.2.1 of BS 594:

Part 1: 2005, Sub-paragraphs (a)

(b) or (c).

Base 904 Rolled

Asphalt

50 pen

bitume

n

Varies Minimum delivery temperature

135oC.

Maximum wind speed 40 km/hr.

Minimum air temperature 00C.

BS 594-1: Table No 2 and

Column No 2/4.

Binder Penetration: 50 pen

Sub Base 803 Granular sub-

base Type 1

- Varies

804 Granular sub-

base Type 2

- Varies Minimum CBR: 30%

9. Regulating Materials - Permitted Options.

(a) Up to 40mm thick beneath wearing course.

Binder Course regulating material shall comply with Clauses 905, 907 and the following:-

We also regulate using TSC ( SMA) under Clause 943

BS 594: Part 1: 2005 Table 2 Column No. 2/1 or 2/2 as appropriate.

Coarse Aggregate as Clause 5

Fine Aggregate as Clause 5

Added filler shall comply with Clause 5.

Binder shall be Binder No. 3

(b) 40mm to 120mm thick beneath wearing course or 40mm to 60mm thick beneath Binder Course

Binder Course regulating material shall comply with Clause 907 and the following: -

Either (i) Rolled Asphalt to Clause 905 and BS 594: Part 1: 2005

Table No. 2, Column Nos. 2/3 or 2/4 as appropriate.

Aggregate Types as Clause 5 sub-paragraphs (a), (b) or (c).

Binder shall be Binder No.3 of Table 1.

or (ii) Dense Macadam to Clause 906 and BS 4987: Part I: 2005.

Table Nos. 13and 14 or 15and 16.

Aggregate Types as Clause 4. sub-paragraphs (a), (b) or (c)

The Binder shall be 125 pen bitumen

(c) Over 60mm thick beneath Binder Course.

Page 149: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 169 THURROCK COUNCIL

Base regulating material shall comply with Clause 907 and the following: -

Either (i) Rolled Asphalt to Clause 904 and BS 594: Part 1: 2005.

Table No. 2 column Nos. 2/5 We do not mix 40mm any more

Aggregate Types as Clause 2.2.1 sub-paragraphs (a), (b) or (c)

Binder shall be Binder No. 3 of Table

Or (ii) Dense Macadam to Clause 903 and BS 4987: Part 1: 2005.

Table Nos. 3 or 4.

Aggregate Types as Clause 4. sub-paragraphs (a), (b) or (c)

The Binder shall be 125pen bitumen.

10 Rate of Spread of Chippings

When required the rate of spread of chippings shall be in accordance with Clause 7.1.3 of BS 594:

Part 2: 1992.

11 Composition of design type F Surface course mixtures.

The composition of design type F Surface course mixtures shall comply with the requirements of

Table 3 to BS 594: Part 1 2005.

Page 150: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 170 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 7/1 SHEET 2

PERMITTED PAVEMENT OPTIONS - FLEXIBLE, FLEXIBLE COMPOSITE AND

SURFACING FOR RIGID COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION

1. Location. The location of the site will be given by the Engineer.

2. Grid for checking surface levels of pavement courses (Clause 702.4) Longitudinal dimension: 10m

Transverse dimension : 2m

3. Surface regularity (Clause 702.7) Category of Road: Category A for ClassA Roads, Category B for all other roads.

4. Not used

5. BS 4987: Part 1 Traffic Category Category A

(20mm size open graded basecourse - Category B)

6. Not used.

7. Requirements for hardness, durability and cleanness of aggregates shall comply with sub-Clause 901.2.

8. Requirements for regulating courses shall comply with Clause 907.

Clause Material Grade of

Binder

Thickness

(mm)

Special Requirements

Surface

Course

909

912

6mm size dense

Surface course

10mm size close

graded Surface

course

125 pen

125 pen

20 to 30

30 to 35

BS 4987: Part I:2005

Tables 29,30 and 31

Aggregate Types:

As Clause 4 of BS 4987: Part 1:

2005

with a minimum PSV of 45 but

excluding limestone, or sub-

paragraph(c) with a minimum PSV

of 50.

BS 4987: Part 1: 2005 Tables 26,27

and 28 Aggregate Types:

As Clause 4 of BS 4987: Part 1:

2005

with a minimum PSV of 45 but

excluding limestone, or sub-

paragraph (c) with a minimum PSV

of 50.

912

914

14mmsize close

graded Surface

course

0/4mm size fine

graded Surface

course

125 pen

190 pen

40 to 55

15 to 25

BS 4987: Part 1: 2005 Tables 23,24

and 25 Aggregates Types:

As Clause 4 of BS 4987: Part 1:

2005 with a minimum PSV of 45 but

excluding limestone, or sub-

paragraph (c) with a minimum PSV

or 50.

BS 4987: Part 1 2005 Tables 34,35

and 36 Aggregates Types:

As Clause 4 of BS 4987: Part 1:

2005

with a minimum PSV of 45 but

excluding limestone, or sub-

paragraph (c) with a minimum PSV

of 50.

Page 151: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 171 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 7/1: SHEET 2 Continued

Binder

course 906 Dense

Binder Course

20mm size open

graded

Binder Course

125 pen

bitumen

190pen

bitumen

50 to 100

45 to 75

BS 4987: Part 1: 2005Tables 13and

14

or 15 and 16

Aggregate Types:

As Clause 4. of BS 4987:

Part 1: 2005 sub-paragraphs (a),(b)

or (c)

SS 4987: Part I: 2005

Tables 5,6 and 7

Aggregate Types:

As Clause 4. of BS 4987:

Part I: 2005 sub-paragraphs (a) or

(c)

Base 903 Dense Base 125 pen

bitumen

90 to 150 BS 4987: Part 1: 2005Tables 3 and 4

Aggregate Types:

As Clause 4. of BS 4987: Part 1:

2005

sub-paragraphs (a) (b) or (c)

9 Regulating Materials - Permitted Options.

(a) Up to 40mm thick beneath wearing course.

Binder Course regulating material shall comply with Clauses 905, 907 and the following:-

We also regulate using TSC ( SMA) under Clause 943

BS 594: Part 1: 2005 Table 2 Column No. 2/1 or 2/2 as appropriate.

Coarse Aggregate as Clause 5

Fine Aggregate as Clause 5

Added filler shall comply with Clause 5.

Binder shall be Binder No. 3

(b) 40mm to 120mm thick beneath wearing course or 40mm to 60mm thick beneath Binder Course

Binder Course regulating material shall comply with Clause 907 and the following: -

Either (i) Rolled Asphalt to Clause 905 and BS 594: Part 1: 2005

Table No. 2, Column Nos. 2/3 or 2/4 as appropriate.

Aggregate Types as Clause 5 sub-paragraphs (a), (b) or (c).

Binder shall be Binder No.3 of Table 1.

or (ii) Dense Macadam to Clause 906 and BS 4987: Part I: 2005.

Table Nos. 13and 14 or 15and 16.

Aggregate Types as Clause 4. sub-paragraphs (a), (b) or (c)

The Binder shall be 125 pen bitumen

(d) Over 60mm thick beneath Binder Course.

Base regulating material shall comply with Clause 907 and the following: -

Page 152: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 172 THURROCK COUNCIL

Either (i) Rolled Asphalt to Clause 904 and BS 594: Part 1: 1992.

Table No. 2 column Nos. 2/5 We do not mix 40mm any more

Aggregate Types as Clause 2.2.1 sub-paragraphs (a), (b) or (c)

Binder shall be Binder No. 3 of Table

Or (ii) Dense Macadam to Clause 903 and BS 4987: Part 1: 2005.

Table Nos. 3 or 4.

Aggregate Types as Clause 4. sub-paragraphs (a), (b) or (c)

The Binder shall be 125pen bitumen.

10 Rate of Spread of Chippings

When required the rate of spread of chippings shall be in accordance with Clause 7.1.3 of BS 594:

Part 2: 1992.

11 Composition of design type F Surface course mixtures.

The composition of design type F Surface course mixtures shall comply with the requirements of

Table 3 to BS 594: Part 1 2005.

Page 153: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 173 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 7/1: SHEET 3

PERMITTED PAVEMENT OPTIONS - FLEXIBLE, FLEXIBLE COMPOSITE AND

SURFACING FOR RIGID COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION

1 Location. The location of site will be given by the Overseeing Organisation

2 Grid for checking surface levels of pavement courses (Clause 702.4) Longitudinal dimension: 10m

Transverse dimension: 2m

3 Surface regularity (Clause 702.7) Category of Road: Category A for Class A Roads

Category B for all other roads.

4. Course Aggregate Nominal size: To be selected by the Contractor

Minimum PSV: As stated in appropriate Schedule of Rates

5. Measurements of Surface Texture to Clause 92 I shall be applicable to all Class A and Broads.' On other classes of road

and circulating areas of roundabouts the surface texture shall be agreed with the Overseeing Organization. The mini

Texture meter shall be used to give indicative results. If the mini Texture Meter results indicate likely failure then

further testing in accordance with Clause 921 shall be undertaken.

6. Wheel tracking and Hydraulic Conductivity: To be agreed with the Overseeing Organisation.

7. Requirements for hardness, durability and cleanness of aggregates shall comply with sub-clause 90 1.2

8. Requirements for regulating course shall comply with Clause 907.

Clause Material Grade of

Binder

Thickness

(mm)

Special Requirements

Surface Course

942

972 AR

Thin Surface

Course (Type A)

Thin Surface

Course (Type B)

Thin Surface

Course (Type C)

SMA

To be

selected by

the

Contractor

To be

selected by

the

Contractor

To be

selected by

the

Contractor

To be

selected by

the

contractor

less than 18

19 to 25

26 to 40

26 to 40

9. Regulating Materials - Permitted Options.

(a) Up to 40mm thick beneath wearing course.

Binder Course regulating material shall comply with Clauses 905, 907 and the following:-

We also regulate using TSC ( SMA) under Clause 943

BS 594: Part 1: 2005 Table 2 Column No. 2/1 or 2/2 as appropriate.

Coarse Aggregate as Clause 5

Fine Aggregate as Clause 5

Added filler shall comply with Clause 5.

Binder shall be Binder No. 3

Page 154: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 174 THURROCK COUNCIL

(b) 40mm to 120mm thick beneath wearing course or 40mm to 60mm thick beneath Binder Course

Binder Course regulating material shall comply with Clause 907 and the following: -

Either (i) Rolled Asphalt to Clause 905 and BS 594: Part 1: 2005

Table No. 2, Column Nos. 2/3 or 2/4 as appropriate.

Aggregate Types as Clause 5 sub-paragraphs (a), (b) or (c).

Binder shall be Binder No.3 of Table 1.

or (ii) Dense Macadam to Clause 906 and BS 4987: Part I: 2005.

Table Nos. 13and 14 or 15and 16.

Aggregate Types as Clause 4. sub-paragraphs (a), (b) or (c)

The Binder shall be 125 pen bitumen

(e) Over 60mm thick beneath Binder Course.

Base regulating material shall comply with Clause 907 and the following: -

Either (i) Rolled Asphalt to Clause 904 and BS 594: Part 1: 1992.

Table No. 2 column Nos. 2/5 We do not mix 40mm any more

Aggregate Types as Clause 2.2.1 sub-paragraphs (a), (b) or (c)

Binder shall be Binder No. 3 of Table

Or (ii) Dense Macadam to Clause 903 and BS 4987: Part 1: 2005.

Table Nos. 3 or 4.

Aggregate Types as Clause 4. sub-paragraphs (a), (b) or (c)

The Binder shall be 125pen bitumen.

10 Rate of Spread of Chippings

When required the rate of spread of chippings shall be in accordance with Clause 7.1.3 of BS 594:

Part 2: 1992.

11 Composition of design type F Surface course mixtures.

The composition of design type F Surface course mixtures shall comply with the requirements of

Table 3 to BS 594: Part 1 2005.

Page 155: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 175 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 7/1: SHEET 1:

PERMITTED PAVEMENT OPTIONS - FLEXIBLE, FLEXIBLE COMPOSITE AND

SURFACING FOR RIGID COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION

1. Locations: Bituminous Road Cushions, As instructed by the Engineer

2. Coated chippings are not required.

Clause Material Grade of

Binder

Thickness

(mm)

Special Requirements

Road

Cushions

Surface

Course

911

10mm Nominal size

Rolled Asphalt

Surface Course

(Design Mix)

50 pen

bitumen

40

SS 594: Part 2005 Table No: 3

Column No: 3/3

Marshall Stability Range 4-8 kN or

6 to 10kN

Marshall Flow: not more than 5mm

for stabilities up to 8 kN and not

more than 7mm for stabilities in

excess of 8 kN.

Aggregate Types:

As Clause 4 of BS 594:

Part 1: 2005 sub-paragraph (a) with

minimum PSV of 45 but excluding

limestone, or sub-paragraph (c) with

a minimum PSV of 50.

Maximum AAV: 14

Laying of Surface course to comply

with the requirements of Clause

708.

3. Locations: Domed areas to mini roundabouts As instructed by the Engineer

Clause Material Grade of

Binder

Thickness

(mm)

Special Requirements

Domed Areas

Surface

Course

911

10mm Nominal

size Rolled

Asphalt Surface

Course

(Design Mix)

50 pen

bitumen

40 SS 594: Part 2005 Table No: 3

Column No: 3/3

Marshall Stability Range 4-8 kN or 6 to

10kN

Marshall Flow: not more than 5mm for

stabilities up to 8 kN and not more than

7mm for stabilities in excess of 8 kN.

Aggregate Types:

As Clause 4 of BS 594:

Part 1: 2005 sub-paragraph (a) with

minimum PSV of 45 but excluding

limestone, or sub-paragraph (c) with a

minimum PSV of 50.

Maximum AAV: 14

Laying of Surface course to comply

with the requirements of Clause 708.

4. Regulating Course materials

30mm to 80mm thick beneath Surface course.

Binder course regulating material shall comply with the following:-

(i) Dense Macadam to Clause 906 and BS 4987: Part 1: 2005Tables 13and 14

Page 156: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 176 THURROCK COUNCIL

or 15 and 16 Aggregate Types: As Clause 4. of BS 4987:Part 1: 2005 sub-paragraphs (a),(b)

or (c). The Binder shall be 125 pen bitumen or grade C54 Tar.

Page 157: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 177 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 7/1: SHEET 1:

PERMITTED PAVEMENT OPTIONS - FLAT TOP BLOCK PAVING ROAD HUMPS

Flat Top Road Hump (Humped Zebra Crossing):-

1. Locations: As instructed by the Engineer.

Flat Top Road Hump

Clause Material Thickness Special Requirements

Road Hump

Surface

Surface Course

911 Rolled Asphalt

Surface Course

(Design Mix)

40mm SS 594: Part 2005 Table No: 3

Column No: 3/3

Marshall Stability Range 4-8 kN or 6 to

10kN

Marshall Flow: not more than 5mm for

stabilities up to 8 kN and not more than

7mm for stabilities in excess of 8 kN.

Aggregate Types:

As Clause 4 of BS 594:

Part 1: 2005 sub-paragraph (a) with

minimum PSV of 45 but excluding

limestone, or sub-paragraph (c) with a

minimum PSV of 50.

Maximum AAV: 14

Laying of Surface course to comply

with the requirements of Clause 708.

Regulating Binder

Course

905, 907 Hot Rolled

Asphalt

Varies BS 594: Part 1: 2005, Table 2

Column No. 2/2, 2/3 or 2/4

Aggregate Types:

As Clause 2.2.1 of BS 594:

Part 1: 2005, Sub-paragraphs (a)

(b) or (c).

Ramp Edge

Block A

Ramp Edge

Block B

750AR 135 to 160

mm

100 to 135

mm

Refer to Note 1

Laying 2601

750AR

Mortar Bed

Ronafix

Design Mix A

min 25mm

max 40mm

25mm for Ramp Edge Blocks

Max 40mm for surface blocks

Base - Existing

Pavement

- Where existing construction inadequate,

Base shall be min. of 100 mm rolled

asphalt complying with Clause 904

Page 158: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 178 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 7/1: SHEET 1:

Flat Top Road Hump or Speed table

Clause Material Thickness Special Requirements

Surface Block 1107 Block Paving

to BS 6717

Part 1

80mm Refer to Note 1

Ramp Edge

Block A

Ramp Edge

Block B

750AR Varies

between

60, 75 or 90

mm overall

height

Refer to Note 1

Laying 2601

750AR

Mortar Bed

Ronafix

Design Mix A

min 25mm

max 40mm

25mm for Ramp Edge Blocks

Max 40mm for surface blocks

Road base - Existing

Pavement

- Where existing construction inadequate,

roadbase shall be min. of 100 mm rolled

asphalt complying with Clause 904

Notes

1. Ramp Blocks to flat top road hump shall be as manufactured by:

Formpave Ltd.,

Tufthorn Avenue,

Coleford,

Gloucestershire GL16 8PR

Tel: 0594 - 836999

Ramp Edge Blocks A & B:- Style Royal Forest Range

Colour RED

Finish: Standard

Page 159: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 179 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 7/1: SHEET 1:

PERMITTED PAVEMENT OPTIONS - FLAT TOP BLOCK PAVING CUSHIONS

Locations: As instructed by the Engineer

Road Cushion Type A - Formpave (see TBC standard detail drawing No SD99/07/009

Road Cushion Design Type A (Formepave).

Clause Material Thickness Special Requirements

Surface Block 1107 Block Paving

to BS 6717

Part 1

80mm Refer to Note 1

Ramp Block A

Ramp Block B

Cushion Edge Block C

Cushion Edge Block D

Cushion Edge Block E

750AR

145 to 175 mm

100 to 145 mm

100 to 175 mm

145 to 175 mm

100 to 145 mm

Refer to Note 1

Laying 2601

750AR

Mortar Bed

Ronafix

Design Mix A

Min 25mm

max 40mm

25mm for Ramp Edge Blocks

Max 40mm for surface blocks

Road base - Existing

Pavement

- Where existing construction

inadequate, roadbase shall be

min. of 100 mm rolled asphalt

complying with Clause 904

Notes

1. Surface Blocks, Ramp, Ramp Edge and Cushion Edge Blocks to Road Cushions Type A shall be as

manufactured by:

Formpave Ltd., Tufthorn Avenue,Coleford,Gloucestershire GL16 8PR, Tel: 0594 - 836999

Surface Block:- Style Royal Forest Range

Colour RED

Finish: Standard

Ramp Edge Blocks A & B:- Style: Royal Forest Range

Colour: RED

Finish: Standard

Surface pattern to Road Humps formed to 90º Herringbone Design.

3. Ronafix polymer admixture for sand cement mortar shall be as manufactured by:-

Ronacrete Ltd., Ronac House, Selinas Lane, Dagenham, Essex RM8 1QL

Tel: 081-593-7621

Equivalent material may be acceptable on the approval of the Engineer.

Ronafix mix design A shall comply with the British Board of Agreement (BBA) Certificate No. 89/2150. Alternatively

Rona Screed Q may be used as a direct replacement to Ronafix admixture to provide an enhanced performance.

4. Following completion of the road hump or Cushion the surface joints shall be filled with fine kiln dried sand complying

with the requirements for grading F in table 5 of BS 882: 1983.The sand shall be brushed in until the joints are filled.

Page 160: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 180 THURROCK COUNCIL

5. The road hump or cushion shall be applied with "Key Bond" jointing sand stabiliser manufactured by Marshalls Mono

Limited or similar approved material.The stabiliser solution shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's

instructions and recommendations.

PERMITTED PAVEMENT OPTIONS - PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE SPEED CUSHION

Locations: As instructed by the Engineer

Speed Cushion Type SP1 (see TBC standard detail drawing No SD99/07/016

Precast Speed Cushion Design Type SP1.

Clause Material Thickness Special Requirements

Precast Speed cushion

75 mm height

Reinforced

concrete

210 mm Refer to Note 1

Colour Red

Laying 751 AR Grade 40/20

concrete

150mm min vibrated beneath the cushion

wearing course finish to

sides of cushion

905 Hot rolled

asphalt

40 mm

Road base - Existing

Pavement

- Where existing construction is

inadequate, sub base to be

prepared for Grade 40/20

concrete base to speed cushion

Note 1

Precast reinforced concrete Speed cushions as manufactured by:-

Marshall Mono Ltd

Hoveringham

Nottingham NG14 7JX

Tel 01636 830381

High Friction Surfaces High Friction Surfaces to CL924 Type Classification: 1,2 and 3. Minimum declared PSV: 70

Page 161: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 181 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 7/2: EXCAVATION, TRIMMING AND REINSTATEMENT OF EXISTING SURFACES 1. For details of existing paved areas which require to be trimmed, regulated and reinstated

to match levels where new and existing pavements abut or where new construction overlays existing pavement see Drawing No EB107. Refer also to Appendices 7/1 and 7/9.

(i) The existing pavement shall be trimmed by the minimum amount in accordance

with Clause 706. (ii) The machinery to be used shall be fitted with equipment for smoke and dust

elimination.

(iii) The following methods may be used:

1. heating and planing, including the removal of the surface material by a mechanical elevator embodied in the heating and planing machine capable of loading the burnt-off material;

2. cold-milling (planing) 3. heating to carbonise excess binder.

(iv) The equipment shall be of an approved type and the Contractor shall provide details of the equipment he proposes to use.

(v) The Contractor shall reinstate, to the approval of the Overseeing Organisation,

road surfaces damaged by excess heating and/or cold-milling (planing). (vi) Equipment for heating small areas shall be suitable for the purpose and approved

by the Overseeing Organisation. Heat applied to small areas shall be just sufficient to soften the material to enable it to be removed by rakes, shovels or forks to the required depth.

(vii) The Contractor shall make suitable temporary ramps to make safe the run-on and

run-off, any raised longitudinal joints and any cover and frame. (viii) Planings shall be delivered to the Employer’s Store. Other surplus material shall be

run to spoil in tips to be provided by the Contractor. (ix) Acceptable materials for reinstating other areas in accordance with sub-Clause

706.8 are Class 1A or 1B granular material. 2 Cross Section diagrams showing typical trench reinstatement in bituminous and concrete

pavements are shown on HCD Drawing No. K4 and Drawing No. EB109. The materials to be used for reinstatements shall be as described in the “Specification for the Reinstatement of Openings in Highways” issued by the Highway Authorities and Utilities Committee, using surface course materials to match existing.

Page 162: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 182 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 7/3 – SURFACE DRESSING Surface

Dressin

Location As directed by the Engineer

Road Surface Hardnes

Hard

Type of Binder Premier polymer modified bitumen binder shall be used. This shall be an emulsion in which a polymer has been incorporated and which can demonstrate enhanced performance properties at both high and low ambient temperatures.

Chippings Uncoated 14 mm granite chippings with uncoated 6 mm granite chippings racked in.

Minimum PSV 65

Maximum AAV 12

Requirements for Rolling

Initial pass with a light steel roller and then compaction by pneumatic multi-wheel roller.

Surface

Dressin

Location As directed by the Engineer

Road Surface Hardnes

Hard

Type of Binder Premier polymer modified bitumen binder shall be used. This shall be an emulsion in which a polymer has been incorporated and which can demonstrate enhanced performance properties at both high and low ambient temperatures.

Chipping Size Single layer of 14 mm uncoated granite chippings

Minimum PSV 65

Maximum AAV 12

Requirements for

Pneumatic multi-wheel roller

Surface

Dressin

Location As directed by the Employer

Road Surface Hardnes

Hard

Type of Binder/Chippings Proprietary Surface Dressing System

Performance Criteria

24 months after laying the surface dressing shall have a surface texture of 1.5 mm as measured by the sand patch test, and shall not have fretted to the extent that more than 25% of the chippings have been lost from the original continuous mosaic pattern.

Minimum PSV 65

Maximum AAV 12

Page 163: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 183 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 7/4: BOND COATS, TACK COATS AND OTHER BITUMINOUS SPRAYS SHEET 1: 1 Location a) Unless otherwise agreed by the Overseeing Organisation the Contractor shall

apply a tack coat or bond coat to all existing bituminous surfaces to receive bituminous overlays and to all base and binder course layers.

2 Bond Coats, Tack coats and other bituminous sprays shall comply with Clause 920

and the following:

1. BINDER CLASSIFICATION AND APPLICATION DETAILS OF TACK COATS

a) Where used in accordance with thin surfacing systems the tack coat shall be in

accordance with the HAPAS Certificate. For other tack coat applications the requirements below shall apply

b) The binder shall be cationic emulsion Class K1-40 to BS434.

c) Rate of spread shall be 0.35 to 0.55 litres/m².

d) There shall be no additives to the binder and the residual binder recovered

from the tack coat in accordance with Clause 923 Rapid Recovery Test shall have a penetration value at 25°C of not more than 300 dmm.

e) Certificates shall be supplied for the sprayer in accordance with clause 920

for rate of spread tolerance and accuracy of spread. f) Street furniture, ironwork and drop-kerbs shall be masked g) Blinding Material shall not be applied.

2 Binder Classification and Application Details of Bond coats

a) Bond coats shall be used beneath surface courses of 25mm nominal thickness or less for carriageways .

b) Bond coat material shall be cationic emulsion. If the nominal layer thickness

is less than 25mm it shall be polymer modified binder with a minimum Vialit cohesion value of 1.2 J/ cm2

c) At the frequency stated in Appendix 1/5, test portions shall be recovered from the emulsion Bond Coat in accordance with Clause 923 (Rapid Recovery

Test).

d) The recovered binder shall be tested as follows: Vialit pendulum cohesion curve

Penetration at 5°C (200g for 60secs.) and at 25°C (BS2000, 100g for 5secs.)

Page 164: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 184 THURROCK COUNCIL

e) The Contractor shall state the calculated rate of spread of residual bitumen, taking into account binder (solids) content of the emulsion. The rate shall take into account the porosity of the surface, the free binder at the surface, the amount of wear due to trafficking, the binder content of the layer to be treated and its permeability and the need for waterproofing. The Contractor shall also state the spray temperatures and pressures for the sprayer to be used with the relevant Bond coat and provide certificates of rate of spread tolerance and accuracy of spread in accordance with SHW clause 920. The calculated rate of spread of residual binder based on actual quantities used and binder content shall be not less than 0.6 kg/m2 (i.e for a 60% emulsion the rate of spread of emulsion required would be 1.0litres/m2).

f) Street furniture, ironwork and drop-kerbs shall be masked

g) Blinding material shall not be used. Bond coats shall not be trafficked by

vehicles other than construction vehicles. If the surface is to be trafficked by construction vehicles a bond coat that does not pick up on tyres shall be used.

Page 165: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 185 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 7/4: BOND COATS, TACK COATS AND OTHER BITUMINOUS SPRAYS SHEET 2: Information to be provided by the Contractor The Contractor shall provide the following information with his tender, or prior to the commencement of the work. 1. The product or products he proposes to use together with their data sheets, product

identification data, cohesivity data as specified. (Clauses 920.2, 920.3, 920.4, 920.5) 2. For each product, a copy of the BS EN ISO 9001 certificate showing the name of the

manufacturer, the name of the certification body and the reference number and date of the certificate.(Clause 920.5)

3. The spraying equipment proposed, and a test certificate (Clauses 920.7, 920.9) 4. The source or sources of blinding material proposed (920.13). 5. Contingency plans in the event of any breakdown. 6. The results of any other tests or other data the Contractor considers would assist the

Overseeing Organisation in assessing the technical merit of the treatment such as:

(i) Tackiness test and/or trafficability time and methods of test. (ii) Breaking time test results for different weather conditions and substrates. (iii) Test results for bond to newly laid concrete. The data supplied should not be more

than 6 months old.

Page 166: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 186 THURROCK COUNCIL

Binder Data Sheet – Appendix 7/4 Bond Coats, Tack Coats and Other Bituminous Sprays

Manufacturer of Binder: Product name:

Binder type: Batch no:

Binder Grade (highlight as required) Conventional Intermediate Premium Super Premium Non-tack Other

Binder Source

Recovered Binder Recovered Binder after Ageing Test

Test

Recovered in accordance with Clause 923

Aged in accordance with Clause 923

Penetration at 25oC O,1mm (100g and 5 secs)

Penetration at 5oC O,1mm (200g and 60 secs)

Vialit pendulum cohesion see Clause 939 maximum peak value J/cm2

The Contractor shall attach a Report and graphical output to this schedule as specified in Clause 939.

The Contractor shall attach a Report and graphical output to this schedule as specified in Clause 939.

Product identification test. The provision of data for identification and ageing is optional for unmodified bituminous emulsions to BS 434 and for bitumen BS EN 12591 and cut back bitumen to BS 3690. Complex shear (stiffness) modulus (G*) and phase angle (δ) data. See Clause 928.

The Contractor shall attach a Report and graphical output to this schedule as specified in Clause 928.

The Contractor shall attach a Report and graphical output to this schedule as specified in Clause 928.

Other properties the Contractor considers useful:

Minimum Binder Content

Binder temperature range for spray application

Emulsion Properties and Viscosity

Break time

Breaking Agent type

Weather limits – information from binder manufacturer: road or air temperatures; humidity; wind chill adjustment; tolerance of surface dampness; etc. Temperature max: Temperature min:

Other

Page 167: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 187 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 7/6: BREAKING UP OR PERFORATION OF EXISTING PAVEMENT 1. Breaking up of Existing Pavement

(i) Plant and equipment used for breaking up existing pavement shall be of a type approved by the Overseeing Organisation who may direct preliminary trials to be carried out to determine the suitability of the plant, equipment and method. The plant and equipment shall be of a type which has a crack propagation effect. The full depth of all bituminous or cementitious material (including sub-base where necessary) shall be broken up and the Overseeing Organisation may direct any necessary trial holes to be made to determine the depth.

(ii) The area to be broken up is shown on the Works Order

(iii) The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to avoid damage to property, structures, drains, sewers, services, instrumentation and the like.

2. Perforation of Existing Pavement

(i) Plant and equipment used for perforating existing pavement shall be of a type approved by the Overseeing Organisation who may direct preliminary trials to be carried out to determine the suitability of the plant, equipment and method. The plant and equipment shall be of a type which has a crack propagation effect. The full depth of all bituminous or cementitious material (including sub-base where necessary) shall be perforated and the Overseeing Organisation may direct any necessary trial holes to be made to determine the depth.

(ii) Holes shall be filled with sand and the surface rolled unless otherwise directed by the Overseeing Organisation.

(iii) The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to avoid damage to property,

structures, drains, sewers, services, instrumentation and the like. (iv) Where described in the Contract the Contractor shall perforate the full depth of the

existing carriageway construction with holes of minimum 100mm diameter on a 1000mm by 1000mm grid to allow free drainage. No perforation shall be made closer than 750mm to a box, cover or grating in the carriageway surface or edge of surfacing material

Page 168: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 188 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 7/7 – SLURRY SURFACING/MICRO-SURFACING/MICRO-ASPHALT

1. Slurry surfacing/micro-surfacing/micro-asphalt shall be applied in accordance

with Clause 918 and the manufacturer’s instructions.

2. All ruts and depressions in the existing surface exceeding 10mm under a 3m

straight edge shall be filled as directed by the Employer either with the

proposed new surfacing material or with hot rolled asphalt.

3. Scheme drawings may stipulate one of the following three methods for preparing the existing surface:

• Scabbling;

• Scratch coat; or

• Pressure washing and drying.

All loose materials shall be removed to Tip. 4. Where laying by mechanical means is not possible, laying by hand may be carried out

subject to the Employer’s acceptance. 5. The Contractor shall guarantee all workmanship and materials against defaults for a

period of two years from the date of completion of the works. Minimum macrotexture at the end of the guarantee period shall be 1mm. Maximum percentage decrease in macrotexture initially measured and at the end of the guarantee period shall be 40%.

6. Where detailed on scheme specific drawings or instructed by the Employer,

Slurry Surfacing, Micro-Surfacing and Micro-Asphalt shall be coloured by the

addition of pigments.

7.

Slurry Surfacing Micro-Surfacing Micro-Asphalt Description Controlled setting

cationic veneer carpet surfacing

Polymer modified dense graded surfacing

Polymer modified dense graded surfacing

Spread Rate 4 to 10 kg/m² 12 kg/m² 24 kg/m² Nominal Thickness

3 to 6mm 8 to 10mm 15mm

Minimum PSV 55 60 60

Scratch Coat

8. When a Scratch Coat is specified for the preparation of the existing surface before

the application of slurry surfacing, micro-surfacing or micro-asphalt, it shall be a

resin based screed specifically formulated to fill voids, minor undulations and

blowholes in both concrete and asphalt surfaces.

9. All substrates shall be clean, dry and structurally sound. All substances that are

detrimental to the bond, such as laitance, dust, dirt, oils, fat, waxes and chemical

contaminants shall be removed. New concrete shall be a minimum of 7 calendar

days old.

Further details of surface preparation, and full application details, shall be as specified by the manufacturer.

Page 169: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 189 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 7/8 – STONE MASTIC ASPHALT SURFACE COURSE

1. General

1.1. Stone Mastic Asphalt shall comply with the general requirements of BS

4987 for coated macadam and Clause 937 and the specific requirements of the following sub-Clauses.

1.2. Mixes shall be HAPAS approved or mix producers shall register their mixes

for approval by a NAMAS approved laboratory and such approval shall be maintained until the mix constituents or characteristics change.

2. Materials 2.1. Aggregates and Fillers 2.1.1. Coarse aggregate shall be crushed rock or crushed slag complying with Clause 901. 2.1.2. When tested in accordance with the procedures in BSEN 13043, the coarse aggregate

shall additionally have the following properties:

Polished Stone Value – generally not less than 60, but as specified in Appendix 7/1 after reference to HD36/99 Table 3.1.

Resistance to Fragmentation – Category LA30, or as specified in Appendix 7/1.

Maximum Aggregate Abrasion Value – not more than 12, or as specified in Appendix 7/1 after reference to HD36/99 Table 3.2.

Maximum Flakiness Index – for coarse aggregate only, Category FI25 or as specified in Appendix 7/1.

Durability (Water Absorption) – Category WA24 or as specified in Appendix 7/1.

3. Mixture

3.1. The target aggregate grading and target binder content proposed for the mixture shall fall within the limits given in Table 1, unless agreed otherwise by the NAMAS approved laboratory identified by the Employer.

TABLE 1 – Target Aggregate Grading and Binder Content

BS Sieve % by mass of total aggregate passing

Designation

0/14mm 0/10mm

Page 170: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 190 THURROCK COUNCIL

20mm 100 -

14mm 90 - 100 100

10mm 35 - 60 90 – 100

6.3mm 23 - 35 30 – 50

4mm - -

2mm 18 - 30 22 – 32

0.063mm 8 - 13 8 – 13

% Binder (min) 6.0 6.5

Adjustment may be required to the above binder content ranges to account for the varying density of slag aggregates, should they be used.

TABLE 2 – Tolerances for Aggregate Grading Limits

BS Test Sieve Tolerances for aggregate grading in % by mass passing BS test sieve

Nominal size

14mm 10mm

14mm ± 5 -

10mm ± 10 ± 5

6.3mm ± 8 ± 10

4mm - -

2mm ± 7 ± 7

0.063mm ± 2 ± 2

Note: The application of these tolerances to the target grading may result in limits outside those permitted by the appropriate envelope in Table 1. This is acceptable.

3.2. The Contractor shall demonstrate the properties of the proposed mixture, at the target composition, by preparing loose mixture and compacted specimens in accordance with the general requirements of BS 598: Part 107. The loose mixture and compacted specimens shall comply with the requirements of sub-Clauses 3.3 and 3.5 below.

Page 171: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 191 THURROCK COUNCIL

3.3. When tested at target composition, the loose mixture shall demonstrate not more than 0.3 percent binder drainage, by total mass of mixture, at a temperature of 17oC, in accordance with BS DD 232.

3.4. Two compacted specimens shall be manufactured with the target grading, at each of at least three binder contents increasing by 0.5%, to determine the optimum binder content and air void contents of these shall be determined by Clause 937 using:

(a) The maximum density of the mixture, obtained using the maximum specific gravity of the loose mixture, determined in accordance with DD228:1996 – Determination of maximum density of bituminous mixtures; and

(b) The bulk density of the specimen, determined in accordance with BS 598: Part 104, Clause 4. Specimens shall be waxed.

3.5. At the target composition, the air void content of the mixture shall be within the range 2 – 4%.

3.6. A graph of binder content and air voids shall be produced by the Contractor and supplied to the NAMAS approved laboratory identified by the Employer together with full details of his mix design showing its compliance with this specification.

4. Mixing

4.1. Stone mastic asphalts shall be mixed in accordance with the requirements of BS 4987:Part 1, such that an homogeneous mixture of aggregate, filler, bitumen and, when used, additive is produced at a temperature in the range 150 – 190oC. At the time of mixing, the coarse aggregate shall be in a surface dry condition.

5. Transportation

5.1. Stone mastic asphalt shall be transported to site in double-sheeted or tented and sealed ridge sheeted insulated (including insulated floor) vehicles.

5.2. To facilitate discharge of stone mastic asphalt, the floor of the vehicle may be coated in accordance with the requirements of BS 594 Clause 4.3. When a coating is used then, prior to loading, the body shall be tipped to its fullest extent, with the tailboard open, to ensure drainage of any excess. The floor of the vehicle shall be free from adherent bituminous materials or other contaminants.

6. Surface Preparation

6.1. Existing surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements of BS 4987 and Series 700. A bond coat shall be applied at the rates of application recommended in BS 594 – 2, Clause 5.

6.2. Where necessary, existing surfaces shall be regulated in accordance with the requirements of Clause 907.

6.3. Ironwork shall be lifted prior to surfacing and painted with hot bitumen as required in BS 4987.

7. Laying

7.1. Stone mastic asphalt shall be laid and compacted in accordance with the requirements of Clause 901, to the thickness stated in sub-Clause 12 below unless otherwise specified in Appendix 7/1.

Page 172: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 192 THURROCK COUNCIL

7.2. All joints shall be formed in accordance with BS 4987:Part 2.

8. Compaction

8.1. Stone mastic asphalt shall be compacted immediately, to practical refusal.

8.2. The maximum air void content of the compacted material shall be as detailed in Table 3, determined from cores, using the methodology described in sub-Clause 3.4 above at a rate of test of 6 No 150mm diameter cores per 1000 square metres of material. The Contractor shall reinstate core holes. Coring shall be restricted to trial sections of each pavement or to other areas at the direction of the Employer.

8.3. Each set of six cores shall be taken as two sets of 3. In each set, 2 cores shall be taken from the wheel tracks and the third from between the wheel tracks. For the purpose of this clause, the wheel track zone shall be taken to be between 0.5m and 1.1m and between 2.55m and 3.15m from the centre of the nearside lane markings for each traffic lane.

TABLE 3 – Air Void Contents of Compacted Materials

Material Mean of 6 Cores Mean of Any Pair

Min % Max % Min % Max %

14mm SMA – to achieve 1.5mm texture depth

2 6 1 7

10mm SMA – to achieve 1.0mm or 1.2mm texture depth

2 6 1 7

Max % figures in Table 3 above shall be increased by 1% where hand lay permitted.

9. Surface Texture (Clause 921)

9.1. Texture depth as specified in Appendix 7/1.

9.2. 10mm SMA material to achieve a minimum Clause 921 texture depth 1.0mm.

9.3. 14mm SMA material to achieve the standard Clause 921 texture depth 1.5mm.

10. Sampling

10.1. The material used on site shall be sampled at the rate of one sample per 200 tonnes laid, or one sample per day, where the daily tonnage laid does not exceed 200 tonnes. The rate of sampling may be relaxed, dependent on test result trends, at the discretion of the Employer.

11. Compliance of Mixture

Page 173: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 193 THURROCK COUNCIL

11.1. When sampled and tested in accordance with the procedures of BS 598, Parts 100, 101 and 102, the aggregate grading limits for compliance purposes shall be those obtained by applying the tolerances given in Table 2 to the grading of the mixture approved under sub-Clause 1.2 of this Appendix.

11.2. When tested in accordance with the methods of BS 598, the sampling and testing tolerances for binder content shall be within 0,5 percent of the target binder content for a single test result and 0.3 percent for the running mean of the latest 10 results.

11.3. For unfamiliar mixtures, a system of trialling shall be undertaken at the start of each scheme. Trial sections of pavement shall be produced for each proposed material mix, aggregate source and batching plant. The trial shall be undertaken to demonstrate compliance with the specification. The rate of material testing shall be reviewed by the Employer at the completion of the trial.

12. Thickness of Material

12.1. Thickness tolerance shall be nominal layer thickness less 5mm.

Page 174: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 194 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 7/9: COLD-MILLING (PLANING) OF BITUMINOUS BOUND FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 1. Locations and depths of cold-milling will be as shown on the Works Order

2. Areas to be swept prior to cold-milling will be as shown on the Works Order

Page 175: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 195 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 11/1: KERBS, FOOTWAYS AND PAVED AREAS

1. Kerb Bed or Bed Thickness

Where referred to on Thurrock Council Folio Drawings Nos. the kerb bed thickness on new sub-

base material or existing kerb bed shall be 175 mm for each of the construction alternatives and

permitted options. On these Drawings references to precast concrete kerb shall apply equally to

granite kerb.

Note that the kerb bed thickness includes the thickness of the mortar bed.

Where referred to on Thurrock council Folio Drawings the bed thickness on formation for concrete

edgings shall be 100mm.

Bed thickness in excess of that stated shall be paid as additional insitu concrete mix ST1. The

width of kerb bed shall be that stated on the drawings.

2. Details of flexible surfacing materials to be used

The type of material will be selected by the Engineer from those listed in the Schedule of

Permitted Pavement Options for Footways and Paved Areas.

3. Required thickness of surfacing and sub-base

The required thickness of surfacing and sub-base of permitted pavement requirements for flexible

construction of footways and paved areas shall be as stated in the appropriate Schedule of this

Appendix unless otherwise changed by the Engineer.

4. Block paving, flag paving, brick paviors and grasscrete paving blocks shall be laid in accordance

with the manufacturer's recommendations and to the pattern (where appropriate) required by the

Engineer.

Tactile, and other textured paved surfaces are defined in the DETR document, Guidance on the use

of tactile paving surfaces.

5. Weedkiller to footway sub grade shall be in accordance with Clause 1171 AR.

6. Conservation Kerb

Conservation kerb shall be hydraulically pressed and have a textured surface finish on two adjacent

faces comprising a silver grey colour granite coarse exposed aggregate finish. Conservation kerb

may also be laid flat. Dropper kerbs shall be lefthand or righthand as required.

Conservation quadrants shall be a solid quadrant 305mm radius x 255mm depth with a textured

surface finish on the top and radius face as that for conservation kerb.

All conservation kerbs and quadrants to be bedded and backed as detailed for precast concrete

kerbs.

7. Trief kebs as manufactured by Redland Precast, Six Hills, Melton Mowbray, Leicestershire, LE14

3PD. Tel 01509 880799

Trief kerbs are to have a bed and backing of 150 mm and 200 mm respectively of ST4 concrete

HGV kerbs as manufactured by Charcon Hard Landscaping, Camas Building Materials

Hulland Ward, Ashbourne, Derbyshire, DE6 3ET Tel 01335 372244

HGV kerbs are to have a bed and backing of 150 mm and 200 mm respectively of ST4 concrete

Page 176: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 196 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 11/1: KERBS, FOOTWAYS AND PAVED AREAS

SCHEDULE OF PERMITTED PAVEMENT OPTIONS - FLEXIBLE SURFACING

CONSTRUCTION FOR FOOTWAYS AND PAVED AREAS

1. Location: The location of the site will be given by the Engineer.

2. Coated chippings are not required.

Clause Material Grade of

Binder

Thickness

(mm)

Special Requirements

Surface

Course

1105

909

914

916

Rolled

Asphalt

Surface

Course

6mm size

dense

wearing

course

3mm size fine

graded

wearing

course

10mm open

graded

wearing

course

50 pen

100 pen

bitumen

200 pen

100 pen

bitumen or

C38 Tar

40

20 to 30

15 to 25

25 to 35

BS 594: Part 1: 2005

Table No.6

Column No: 6/2 Schedule 1A or

2A

Aggregate Types:

As Clause 2.2.1 of BS 594:

Part 1: 2005 sub-paragraph (a) and

(b).

Minimum air temperature for

laying wearing course: 5° C.

BS 4987: Part 1: 2005

Tables 29,30 and 31.

Aggregate Types:

As Clause 4.2.1 of BS 4987:

Part 1: 2005 sub-paragraph

(a) with a minimum PSV of 45 but

exceeding limestone, or sub-

paragraph (c) with a minimum

PSV of 50.

BS 4987: Part 1: 2005

Tables 34,35 and 36

Aggregate Types:

As Clause 4.2.1 of BS 4987:

Part 1: 2005 sub-paragraph (a) with

a minimum PSV of 45 but

excluding limestone, or sub-

paragraph (c) with a minimum

PSV of 50.

BS 4987: Part 1: 2005

Tables 20,21 and 22,

Aggregate Types:

As Clause 4.2.1 of BS 4987:

Part 1: 2005 sub-paragraph (a) or

(c).

Page 177: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 197 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 11/1 (CONTD)

Clause Material Grade of

Binder

Thickness

(mm)

Special Requirements

Binder

Course

Base

Sub-base

905

906

904

903

803

1038

Rolled

Asphalt

Binder

Course

Dense

basecourse

Rolled

Asphalt

Dense

Roadbase

Granular sub-

base Type 1

CBM3

50 pen

bitumen

100 pen

bitumen or

Grade C54

Tar

50 pen

bitumen

100 pen

bitumen

25 to 50

60 to 100

Varies

Varies

75 to 150

75 to 150

BS 594: Part 1: 2005

Table 2

Column No.2/1

Aggregate Types:

As Clause 2.2.1 or BS 594:

Part 1: 2005 sub-paragraphs (a)

(b) or (c).

BS 4987: Part 1: 2005

Tables 13 and 14 or 15 and 16

Aggregate Types:

As Clause 4.2.1 of BS 4987:

Part 1: 2005 sub-paragraphs (a) or

(b).

BS 594: Part 1:2005.Table 2

Column No 2/5 or 2/6

Aggregate Types:

As Clause 2.2.1 of BS 594:

Part 1: 2005, Sub-paragraphs (a), (b)

or (c).

BS 4987: Part 1:2005 Column No

Tables 1 and 2 or 3 and 4

Aggregate Types:

As Clause 4.2.1 of BS 4987:

Part 1: 2005, Sub-paragraphs (a), (b)

or (c).

Page 178: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 198 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 11/1: KERBS, FOOTWAYS AND PAVED AREAS

PERMITTED PAVEMENT OPTIONS - PRECAST CONCRETE FLAG CONSTRUCTION

FOR FOOTWAYS AND PAVED AREAS

1. Locations As instructed by the Engineer

Clause Material Thickness

(mm)

Special Requirements

Surfacing 1104 400mm x 400mm

Precast Concrete

Tactile or textured Flags

50 Refer to Note 1.

Laying 2404 Mortar bed 25 Class 2 or 3 mortar

min 10 mm, max 40

mm

Sub-base 1038 CBM3 100

TOTAL PAVEMENT THICKNESS 175

Notes:

1. Tactile paving flags shall comply with the DETR Mobility Unit Guidance on the Use of tactile Paving

Surfaces.

The tactile surface modules A, B and C shall comprise of spherical domes with "flattened tops". Flags shall be

hydraulically pressed in accordance with BS 7263.

COLOUR: Red at the Controled Pedestrian Crossing i.e. Zebra Crossings.

Buff at uncontrolled pedestrian refuge island crossings as indicated on the scheme layout

drawings.

Page 179: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 199 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 12/1: TRAFFIC SIGNS: GENERAL (i) Location of traffic signs

The locations and details of all new and re-sited traffic signs are shown on the Works Order

(ii) Light spill screens.

(a) Detail drawings to be provided by the Engineer.

(iii) Sign faces, plates and posts.

(a) All retroreflective sheeting and non-reflective film shall be of the same manufacturer and compatible one with the other. They shall be processed and applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions using heat activated adhesive and a heat lamp applicator with a temperature controller for Class I, Class II and non-reflective signs. For Class O sign requirements shall be as set out in paragraph (xix).

(b) All sign plates shall be manufactured in accordance with Chapter 7 of the Traffic Signs Manual and Local Transport Note 1/94. They shall be of the permanent type and manufactured from either sheet aluminium or extruded aluminium sections (planks) conforming with BS EN 12899-1:2001 or recycled plastic as set out in paragraph (xviii). Preparation of the aluminium base material prior to application of sheeting and film shall be in accordance with the instructions of the sheeting and film manufacturer.

(c) All stiffening and framing shall be constructed of aluminium section of equivalent strength (section modulus) to that of the mild steel tabulated in Chapter 7 of the Traffic signs Manual. All joints shall be welded.

(d) Clear coating and edge sealing of signs shall be in accordance with the sheeting and film manufacturer’s recommendations.

(e) All steel posts, lighting unit arms, brackets and fittings shall be shot-blasted and rust proofed and shall have an applied finish which shall be in an approved self-coloured coating material of a thickness of not less than 0.08mm for a stoved epoxy finish or 0.40mm for a fluidized bed or extruded PVC finish. A chlorinated rubber finish of suitable thickness may be used if approved by the Overseeing Organisation.

(iv) Foundations

(a) Concrete for foundations shall be ST5 Concrete as shown on the Typical Sign Detail Drawing No. EN100 and to the dimensions shown on the Task Order for each sign. 50mm diameter ducts shall be incorporated into the foundations for illuminated traffic signs as necessary with smooth bends to enable lighting cables to be drawn through into posts to the requirements of Drawing No. EM101.

Page 180: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 200 THURROCK COUNCIL

(v) Post details.

(a) Posts shall be constructed of steel or other material approved by the Overseeing Organisation to the dimensions shown on the Works Order for each sign. The Contractor may submit to the Overseeing Organisation for its approval alternative posts to those specified but each submission shall be accompanied by a detailed calculation of the design of alternative posts.

(b) All posts shall be complete with matching caps and shall have base plates with a minimum area in accordance with BSEN 12899:1 or 0.05 square metre whichever is the greater.

(vi) Electrical equipment compartments.

(a) All illuminated sign assemblies shall be provided with one large base post to house the requisite electrical

equipment.

(b) The base housing shall be circular in section. It shall have an internal diameter of not less than 165 mm. Door

openings and backboard sizes shall be large enough to accommodate all the control gear, cable terminations,

photocell relay, etc. The service cable entry slot shall be at least 0.3 m below ground level. The door opening

of not less than 450mm x 100 mm shall be fitted with a weatherproof metal door having a vandal-resistant

lock comprising a triangular headed screw bolt. The backboard shall be hardwood not less than 12 mm thick

securely fixed to the back of the compartment on which the electrical equipment shall be mounted.

(c) All wiring access holes shall be weatherproof and all housings shall be rust proofed.

(d) The electrical installation for traffic signs shall be earthed in accordance with the current edition of the IEE

Wiring Regulations for Electrical Installations.

(e) Any external wiring shall be fitted in steel galvanised conduit or alternatively the cable may be Steel Wire

Armoured and securely clipped to the post.

(f) All holes for cables, wires, bolts, access etc., shall have smooth finish without any sharp edges.

2. The type of sign face material including the Class of any retro-reflective material.

(a) Internally illuminated signs:

(a) These shall be fabricated from a vandal-resistant material such as GRP or other material approved by

the Engineer, and shall comply with the relevant requirements of Chapter 11, Appendix V and

Chapter 13, Section 6 of the Traffic Signs Manual.

(b) Externally illuminated and non-illuminated signs.

(a) These shall be manufactured either from sheet aluminium of not less than 11 swg or 3 mm thickness

or from extruded aluminium plank sections and shall be reflectorised.

(c) Bollards

(a) The construction of all internally illuminated bollards shall conform to BS 873-3, and shall be

complete with a standard base unit. The base section of the bollards shall be attached to a concrete

foundation by four holding-down bolts. Bollards shall be of the knock-down type with shear bolts.

The construction of base lit bollards shall comprise an internally illuminated LED unit and suitable

for the fixing of a GRP bollard.

(b) The construction of reflective bollards shall be of reflective material and the base section of the

bollard shall be attached to a concrete foundation by four holding-down bolts.

3. The type of any direct illumination.

(a) The type of illumination shall be as stated on the Traffic Sign Detail drawing for each sign.

(b) All lighting units shall be LED

(c) All lighting units shall comply with the IEE requirements and those of the appropriate Electricity Company.

4. The method of switching the illumination, e.g. photo-electric control, time switch.

(a) Photo-electric cell set at 20/20 lux or

Page 181: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 201 THURROCK COUNCIL

(b) Incorporated into the LED gear tray set at 20/20 lux

5. External Lighting Lanterns

(a) These shall comply with BS 873-5, BS EN 60598-2-3 and the Traffic Signs Manual in accordance with the

recommendations of the Institution of Lighting Engineers. Lanterns shall be designed for downward or upward

illumination, be fitted with LED gear trays.

(b) units shall have either polycarbonate or High Impact Acrylic lenses secured by a vandal resistant locking

device or screws of non-ferrous material.

(c) All sign lighting units shall not be able to be rotated on their support bracket, and will be secured by anti-

rotational locking screws. The body must also be made from extruded aluminium.

(d) All units shall have gasket seals and preferably be protected from the ingress of dust and dirt to at least IP 54

standard.

6. The number of keys required for locks to traffic sign housings (Clause 1202.6).

(a) The Contractor shall supply a set of three keys for each lock type to traffic sign housings to the Engineer.

7. Details of location identifying marks (Clause 1202.7).

(a) Finished signs shall be marked on the reverse in accordance with Clause 7.1.1 of BS EN 12899-1.

(b) All illuminated traffic signs (and when required non-illuminated traffic signs) shall be identified by a

numbering and lettering system in accordance with a schedule which will be provided by the Engineer. The

characters should be a minimum of 75 mm in height, black, printed or stuck on to a self-adhesive white plastic

background which shall be reflective to Table 6 material of BS EN 12899-1 standard. The appropriate label

shall be stuck to a post of the sign or the back of the sign as directed at a height of 1.8 metres above ground

level. The characters shall face in the direction directed by the Engineer.

8. Cabling and Electrical Equipment.

(a) Secondary isolation of each sign is to be provided by a double pole fuse carrier and neutral link incorporating

the correctly rated BS 88, HRC fuse link.

(b) Double insulated tails of the correct colour coding and sufficient length to reach from the secondary isolation

to the supply cut-out shall be provided by the Contractor.

(c) The Contractor shall also provide wiring between the terminal block of the sign lighting fitting and the

secondary isolation in the base of the support post and it shall be polyvinyl chloride insulated and sheathed

cable of 600/1000 volt grade having a copper conductor size of not less than 2.5 mm2. All cables shall be

correctly colour coded and of sufficient length to reach the cut-out and be connected into the secondary

isolation.

(d) Conduit should be provided between the support post housing, the electricity supply and the stub post, of

another support post where this type of mounting is used. Allowance should be made for drilling the posts as

required.

(e) The Contractor shall not connect or disconnect the wiring to the supply where this requires the removal of the

Electricity Company’s fused cut-out. The Contractor shall not remove any posts containing a live Electricity

Company service.

9. Earthing

(a) All metal work (other than current carrying paths) shall be earthed in accordance with BS 7671.

(b) The earth conductor shall be connected, at the base compartment, into an earthing block.

(c) A single core earth bond (6 mm2 PVC insulated, colour – green/yellow) crimped and connected to the earth

bolt of the sign post shall also be connected to the main earth terminal block.

(d) A further 6 mm2

earth bond shall be connected into the main earth terminal block and be left at a sufficient

length to be connected to the supply cut-out.

10. Notification to the Engineer

(a) The Contractor shall notify the Engineer as soon as all installations on a site or contained in one order are

complete and awaiting the connection of a supply by the Regional Electricity Company.

Page 182: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 202 THURROCK COUNCIL

(vii) Covering of signs.

(a) For covering periods of up to one year, an adhesive graphic overlay plastic film shall be used to support the temporary sign face sheeting. The Overlay Film, or similar equivalent, should be a durable removable transparent polyester film. It should be coated with pressure sensitive transparent adhesive with a protective removable liner. The film should be designed for the production of attractive multi-coloured overlays, which can be applied to a variety of reflective and non-reflective surfaces. When properly applied to smooth surfaced highly retroreflective materials, the application of Graphic Overlay Film shall result in signs which have a similar day-time and night-time appearance. The Overlay Film should contain a pressure-sensitive adhesive which is water-activated and be designed to allow the overlay to be removable.

(b) Signs erected prior to the date of implementation of a new road layout or a Traffic Regulation Order to which they refer shall be covered in accordance with Clause 1209.1 until that date.

(viii) Supply of sign fabrication drawings

(a) The Contractor shall submit details of fabrication drawings to the Overseeing Organisation for approval six weeks before the fabrication of any traffic sign.

(ix) Traffic sign housings

(a) The Contractor shall supply a set of three keys for each lock type to traffic sign housings to the Overseeing Organisation.

(x) Location identifying marks

(a) Finished signs shall be marked on the reverse in accordance with Clause 7.1.1 of BS EN 12899-1:2001.

(b) All illuminated traffic signs (and when required non-illuminated traffic signs) shall be identified by a numbering and lettering system in accordance with a schedule which will be provided by the Overseeing Organisation. The characters should be a minimum of 75mm in height, black, printed or stuck on to a self-adhesive white plastic background which shall be reflective to Table 6 material of BS EN12899-1:2001 standard. The appropriate label shall be stuck to a post of the sign or the back of the sign as directed at a height of 1.8 metres above ground level. The characters shall face in the direction directed by the Overseeing Organisation.

(xi) Storage of signs

(a) Where signs are to be stored prior to erection, the following recommendations shall be followed:

(i) If stored indoors, the packaging (provided it is dry) shall not be removed unless storage is to be for an extended period of time (more than 4 weeks). If packaging is removed, the SCW82 slip sheeting should remain in situ to protect the sign face. In either case, the signs shall be supported on wooden battens in the upright position so that they do not touch.

Page 183: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 203 THURROCK COUNCIL

(ii) If it is necessary to store signs outdoors, all packaging must be removed and the signs placed on wooden battens in the upright position with plenty of space for free air circulation.

(b) Signs shall not come into contact with treated wooden posts and shall not be allowed to stand in water at any time. Sharp or heavy objects shall not be placed on or against signs during storage.

(c) During sign erection, measures shall be taken to ensure that signs are not abraded, impacted or otherwise marked.

(xii) Warranty of signs

(a) All signs supplied against the specification shall be warranted in accordance with the specification and its appendices.

(b) Upon receipt of this specification and prior to supplying signs against it, the Contractor shall obtain from the sign manufacturer and shall forward a confirmation to the Overseeing Organisation offered jointly by the sign manufacturer and the supplier of the retroreflective sheeting and non-reflective film, in which the terms, conditions and benefits of the warranty are detailed.

(c) The sign manufacturer and the sign face material supplier jointly shall repair or replace and when necessary dismantle and re-erect any sign which fails to provide the performance set out in the specification. Such repair or replacement shall be completed within a reasonable period as agreed with the Overseeing Organisation.

(xiii) Filling of pockets in concrete foundations. Filling of pockets formed in concrete foundations shall be as sub-Clause 1208.4.

(xiv) Recycled plastic sign plates.

(a) The recycled plastic sign plate shall be made from recycled non-rigidised polyplastic sheet incorporating homogeneous post mounting brackets. The brackets shall be welded to the back of the sign plate, leaving the sign face area free from any protruding rivets or other mechanical fixings.

(b) The recycled plastic sign plate shall be made from recycled household and industrial waste plastics. It shall be prepared using the manufacturers special mix design and converted into sign back plate and post mounting brackets.

(c) Materials Properties:

(1) The polyplastics used shall be non-rigidised and withstand high impact force without shattering. The sign plates shall be non-permeable to water and steam, making the recycled plastic sign plate easy to clean. It shall also be highly resistant to chemical attacks including alkali bases.

Page 184: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 204 THURROCK COUNCIL

(2) The recycled plastic sign plate shall be fully stable within the temperature range –28 deg.C to +82 deg.C. At lower temperatures, the materials rigidisation shall increase by approximately 2.0% per each degree C drop in temperature becoming 50% shatter proof at around –55 deg. C. At higher temperature, the materials stiffness may be reduced accordingly to a thermal forming temperature at 162 deg. C.

(d) Physical Properties: The recycled plastic sign plate shall be tested to the following requirements without sustaining any deformation or damage: Impact Strength Test at 30 kg/sq.m(to BS 2782-306A) Falling Weight Impact Strength to 2.3 Mtr-Kg (to BS873)

(e) Weights and Densities: The recycled plastic sign plate shall weigh approximately 5.8 Kg/sq metre, and have a Specific Gravity of 0.9556.

(f) Surface Adhesion: The recycled plastic sign plate shall have been tested and approved to accept the retroreflective sign face materials which the manufacturer proposes to use.

(g) Materials Degradation: The parent material used in the mix design shall be long lasting and shall be biodegradable by 50% over a period of 85 years.

(xv) Class 0 Sign Requirements

(a) Requirements for type of material preparation and finish, for sign plates, etc. The retroreflective sheeting shall have a smooth surface and a distinctive interlocking diamond seal-pattern with ‘orientation’ marks visible from the face. The sheeting shall be precoated with a pressure sensitive adhesive backing which is protected by a removable liner. The adhesive shall require no heat for proper bonding to substrates when applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

(b) Test Methods

(1) Unless Otherwise specified, all applied and unapplied test samples and

specimens shall be conditioned for 24 hours at 23° +/-3o Centigrade and 50

+/-5 ∼ % relative humidity prior to testing.

(2) Unless otherwise specified, when tests are to be performed on applied test specimens, the retroreflective material shall be applied to smooth aluminium alloy NS4 half-hard 1.6mm thick. The application surface of the aluminium shall be degreased and lightly acid etched previous to the specimens being applied.

Page 185: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 205 THURROCK COUNCIL

(c) Physical Requirements

(1) Colours The chromaticity shall comply with the limits defined in the Chromaticity & Luminance Factor Table below and the luminance factor shall also comply with the limits defined in that table when measured using the apparatus described in Clause 6.2 of BS 873: Part 1: 1983. The procedure described in Clause 6.3 of BS 873: Part 1: 1983 shall be varied as follows:- Measurements shall be made using a polychromatic Standard Illuminant

D65. The sample shall be illuminated at 0° to the surface and measure the

reflected light in the direction of 45° to the normal to its surface (CIE 0/45 geometry).

CHROMATICITY & LUMINANCE FACTOR 1 2 3 4 Luminance x y x y x y x Y Factor Red 0.690 0.310 0.595 0.315 0.569 0.341 0.655 0.345 >0.03 Yellow 0.545 0.454 0.487 0.423 0.427 0.483 0.465 0.534 >0.24 Blue 0.078 0.171 0.150 0.220 0.210 0.160 0.137 0.038 >0.01 White 0.355 0.355 0.305 0.305 0.285 0.325 0.335 0.375 >0.40 Green 0.313 0.682 0.313 0.453 0.248 0.409 0.127 0.557 >0.01

(2) Coefficient of Retroreflection R

The coefficient of retroreflection of the sheeting shall be not less than the values specified in the Minimum Coefficient of Reflection Table below. Measurement shall be made in accordance with CIE Publication 54:1982 as follows: Entrance Angle (Beta1) = -5, 15 and, 40 degrees Entrance Angle (Beta2) = 0 degrees Observation Angle (Alpha) = 20 and, 30 minutes, and 1 degree Rotation Angle (Epsilon) = 0 degrees

Page 186: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 206 THURROCK COUNCIL

MINIMUM COEFFICIENTS OF RETROREFLECTION Essex Class O

Candelas per lux per square metre

Observation Angle (alpha)

Entrance Angles (colour)

Beta2

Beta1

-5° 0°

15°

40°

20’ White 300 250 30 Yellow 250 200 25 Red 75 60 7 Blue 15 12 1.7 Green 30 20 2.5

30’ White 250 220 35 Yellow 200 175 30 Red 57 50 9 Blue 10 8 2 Green 25 18 3

1° White 80 60 15

Yellow 65 45 13 Red 20 14 5 Blue 4 3.5 0.8 Green 8 6 1.2

(3) Impact resistance The test specimen shall be applied to a test panel 150mm x 150mm x 1mm thick and conditioned in accordance with (b) (1) above. A 0.91 Kilogram Weight with a 15.8mm diameter rounded tip shall be dropped onto the centre of the test panel from the height necessary to generate an impact of 11.3 Nm. The test shall be carried out at temperatures of 0 degrees and 23 degrees Centigrade. There shall be no apparent change in the optical properties or cracking of the retroreflective material outside a circle with the point of impact as the centre and with a radius equal to 8mm.

(4) Adhesive

(i) Liner: The protective liner shall be removable from the adhesive coating by peeling without soaking in water or other solutions and, without breaking, tearing or removing any adhesive from the retroreflective sheeting. The protective liner shall be easily removed following accelerated storage for 4 hours at 71 degrees Centigrade under a load of 0.175Kg/cm2.

(ii) Adhesion:

The adhesive strength shall be capable of supporting a 0.79kg weight for 5 minutes without the bond peeling for a distance of more than 50mm when applied to a test panel prepared, in accordance with (b)(2) above.

Page 187: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 207 THURROCK COUNCIL

(iii) Testing

Liner Adhesion:

Subject two 50mm x 150mm test specimens of reflective material to a temperature of 70 degrees Centigrade and a pressure of 0.175 kg/sq.cm for 4 hours. Bring the materials to equilibrium at standard conditions and cut one 25mm x 150mm specimen from each piece and remove the protective liner by hand without the use of water or other solvents. During the removal it shall be noted whether any liner breaks or tears, or removes any adhesive from the backing.

Adhesion to Substrate:

Prepare two 25mm x 150mm specimens of the sheeting. Apply 100mm of each 25mm x 150mm specimen to a test panel, prepared as described in (b) (2) above and condition as specified in (b) (1) above. Suspend the panels horizontally with the test specimen facing downwards. Attach a 0.79kg weight to the free end of each test specimen and allow it to hang free at an angle of 90 degrees to the panel surface for 5 minutes. At the end of the 5 minute period measure the distance of peeling. Failure of any one specimen shall constitute failure of the test.

(5) Resistance to Corrosion – Saline Mist Test panels – prepared in accordance with (b) (2) above shall be subjected to saline mist in accordance with Clause 13 of BS 873:Part 1:1983. After exposure the test specimen shall show no signs of corrosion liable to impair the efficiency.

(6) Resistance to Weathering Test panels – prepared in accordance with (b)(2) above shall be exposed to two years natural weathering in accordance with Clause 15 of BS 873: Part 1:1983. After ageing, the coefficient of retroreflection measured at the 20’ observation angle and –5 degrees entrance angle shall be not less than 80% of the values in the Table of Minimum Coefficient of Retroreflection as relevant.

(7) Resistance to the Effects of Water Specimens of virgin material, as well as specimens that have been exposed in accordance with (c)(6) above, shall be further exposed to a continuous film of water sprayed on using the apparatus defined in Clause 16.2.2 of BS 873:Part 1:1983. The coefficient of retroreflection when measured wet and in accordance with (c)(2) above at the 20’ observation angle and –5 degree entrance angle shall be not less than 70% of the relevant values in the Table of Minimum Coefficient of Retroreflection.

Page 188: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 208 THURROCK COUNCIL

(8) Resistance to Dirt Specimens previously tested in accordance with (c)(6) and (c)(7) above tested in accordance with Clauses 17.2 and 17.3 of BS 873:Part 1:1983; except that the specimen shall if necessary be cleaned using a soft natural bristle brush and, that the coefficient of retroreflection measured in accordance with (c)(2) at the 20’ observation angle and –5 degree entrance angle shall be not less than 80% of the relevant value in the Table of Minimum Coefficient of Retroreflection as appropriate.

(9) Resistance to Heat

(i) Specimens applied to test panels and conditioned in accordance with (b)(1) above measured in accordance with (c)(2) above at the 20’ observation angle and –5 degree entrance angle.

(ii) The test panels shall be exposed to a temperature of 77 +/-3° Centigrade for 24 hours in an air circulating oven. The coefficient of retroreflection shall then be measured again at room temperature as in (c)(9)(i) above and the value shall be not less than 70% of the value previously measured in accordance with (c)(9)(i) above.

High Mast Beacon Type 1

Conventional Planted Post Conventional high mast beacons shall be galvanised 5 metre" POPLAR"

columns to BS 5649 as manufactured by British Steel and as described on TBC Detail

Drawing No SD99/12/003.

The internal electrical gear for the high mast beacon shall be located in the broadbase

housing. Refer to Appendix 14/5

The post shall be finished in grey with white reflective 3M film bands in accordance with

Chapter 4 of the Traffic Signs Manual ( Fig 4.89 ). The beacon shall be a white high

visibility globe. (Triplex Vizibeacon.).

Type of Columns: Planted columns Surface preparation and protective system, external and internal surfaces, overall

treatment galvanising in accordance with BS 5649 Part 4.

Painting requirements shall be in accordance with Chapter 4 of the Traffic Signs manual (Fig 4.89). Surface

preperation shall be as follows:-

(a) Thoroughly wash surface with warm detergent water followed by clean water rinse.

Dry off.

(b) Degrease surface with Dacrylate thinner R5 or where required pre treat with Dacrylate

Mordant solution type T ref: 150-23

(c) Apply by brush or spray, one coat of Vinadac HB MIO, ref: 47-172 (Dark Grey) to an

approximate wet film thickness of 190 microns to acheive a dry film thickness of 75

microns. The contractor shall apply the paint in accordance with the manufacturers

reccomendations

Ground Section shall be applied with Pitch Epoxy (2 packs). Minimum dry film thickness

100 microns from the bottom of the Column to 250 mm above ground level.

High Mast Beacon Type 2 (removable type)

Conventional Sign Post 76 mm dia with broadbase 140 mm dia to be used in conjunction with demountable chamber

type PT1.

The internal electrical gear for the high mast beacon shall be located in the broadbase

housing Refer to Appendix 14/5

The post shall be finished in grey with white reflective 3M film bands in accordance with

Chapter 4 of the Traffic Signs Manual ( Fig 4.89 ).

Page 189: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 209 THURROCK COUNCIL

The beacon shall be a white high visibility globe. (Triplex Vizibeacon.).

High Mast Beacon Type 3

Flanged breakaway posts shall be as manufactured by Triplex Engineering Ltd, Upper

Church Lane, Tipton, West Midlands DY4 9NZ. Tel 021 559 3446, Fax 021 522 2169.

The breakaway post comprises a two piece assembly with seperate foundation service box

which is attached M10 Brass shear bolts as follows:-

Breakaway LBO 365 Post, Foundation root box LBO 365 with Reyroll socket

disconnection and Light gallery to fit 100 Watt GLS longlife lamp.

The post shall be finished in grey with white reflective 3M film bands in accordance with

Chapter 4 of the Traffic Signs Manual ( Fig 4.89 ). The beacon shall be a white high

visibility globe. (Triplex Vizibeacon.).

Page 190: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 210 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 12/2: TRAFFIC SIGNS: MARKER POSTS Hazard Marker Post Type1

(i) Hazard marker posts shall comply with BS 873 and Chapter 4 of the Traffic Signs Manual (Diag. 561). Posts shall

be located as shown on the Layout Drawings.

(ii) Hazard marker posts shall be installed as shown on Drawing No SD98/12/007 in a foundation comprising 100mm

surround of class ST2 concrete.

(i) Hazard marker posts Type 1 shall be "Vergemaster" as manufactured by:-

Glasdon UK Ltd.,

Preston New Road,

Blackpool,

Lancashire FY4 4UL.

Tel: 01253 -694811.

Fax 01253 -792558

Hazard Marker Post Type 2

(i) Hazard marker posts shall comply with BS 873 and Chapter 4 of the Traffic Signs Manual (Diag. 561). Posts shall

be located as shown on the Layout Drawings.

(ii) Hazard marker posts shall be installed as shown on Drawing No SD98/12/007 in a foundation comprising 100mm

surround of class ST2 concrete.

(i) Hazard marker posts Type 2 shall be "Simsco Simflex Verge marker" as manufactured by:-

Simsco (Traffic Safety Products),

A Division of Stimsonite Europa Ltd),

The Stables,

Clevedon Hall Estate,

Victoria Road

Clevedon

Avon BS21 7SD

Tel: 01275 -341123.

Fax 01275 -341169

Removable Marker Post/Bollard Type 3

(ii) Removable marker post/bollard Type 3 shall be Glasdon Neopolitan 150 bollard, complete

with Socket, Lock and Key.

Stone Colour with Class 1, 1x150mm type D retroreflective band,split red/white

The socket base unit shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers installation document for correct

operation of the unit. Foundation details are shown on Drawing No SD98/12/007

Manufactured by :-

Glasdon UK Ltd.,

Preston New Road,

Blackpool,

Lancashire FY4 4UL.

Tel: 01253 -694811.

Fax 01253 -792558

Page 191: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 211 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 12/3: TRAFFIC SIGNS: ROAD MARKINGS AND STUDS

(a) WHITE RAISED RIB EDGE LINES

1. The Material shall comply with BS 3262: Parts 1 and 2 (Class A ).

2. Reflectorisation shall be effected by the incorporation of solid glass beads (BS 6088 Class A or

BSEN 1423:1998) within the mixture and the application of surface glass beads (BS 6088 Class B)

both in accordance with BS3262.

(b) YELLOW TRANSVERSE BAR MARKINGS

1. The material shall be laid in hot screed applied thermoplastic complying with the requirements of

BS3262: Part 1 and Part 3 except as varied below:

2. Table 1 Proportion of Constituents of Mixture.

Constituent Percentage by Mass of Total Mixture

Minimum Maximum

Binder (Resin and Oil) 18 22

Pigment and Extender 18 22

Solid Glass Beads 18 22

Calcined Bauxite 18 22

Other Aggregate 18 22

3. Reflectorisation by the surface application of solid glass beads comply with BS 3262: Part 3.

4. The material shall be laid in accordance with BS3262: Part 3 and shall be screed applied.

5. When tested in accordance with BS3262: Part 1 Appendix J, the skid resistance of the material

shall be not less than 55.

(c) RESTRICTION OF BINDER TYPE FOR THERMOPLASTIC MATERIALS

Formulation containing ROSIN (either gum or wood rosin) in the natural state shall not be offered within the Tender.

(d) SKIDDING RESISTANCE

Except where otherwise stated the Skidding Resistance Value (SRV) of marking materials listed in the Schedules of

Rates shall be 55. (BS 3262: Part 1, Clause 8.5 and BS 6044: Clause 5.15)

(e) ROUTINE SAMPLES

The Overseeing Organisation may require the Contractor to provide samples for testing in accordance with the

appropriate British Standard. In the case of thermoplastic materials, a certificate of sampling shall be supplied with all

samples. The test results of these samples will be used as assessment of compliance with the specification.

(f) DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES

The length and width of road markings shall be as specified with a permitted tolerance as follows:-

(i) Length: +10% -5%

(ii) Width: +10% -5%

(iii) The thickness of road markings shall be as follows:

1 Thermoplastic Materials

1.1 When applying a first marking by screed on a surface of texture depth greater or equal to 1.5 mm the thickness

shall be not less than 2.00 mm nor greater than 5.00 mm.

Page 192: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 212 THURROCK COUNCIL

1.2 When applying a first marking on a surface of texture depth less than 1.5 mm, for "Screed Lines" the thickness

shall be not less than 2.00mm nor greater than 5 mm

1.3 When applying extruded material irrespective of texture depth, the thickness shall be 3.00 mm ± 0.5 mm.

1.4 When applying yellow material irrespective of texture depth, the thickness shall be not less than 2 mm nor

greater than 5 mm for screed lines.

(g) SETTING OUT

The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct setting out of all lines, words, arrows and stripes. The Overseeing

Organisation's Representative will give advice and provide layout drawings required by the Contractor to enable him to

site the markings in their correct positions. Unless otherwise directed, on roads having reflecting road studs,

intermittent lines shall be laid symmetrically between the studs.

(h) PREPARATION OF ROAD SURFACES

Before the application of thermoplastic or paint markings, the road surface shall be prepared in accordance with BS

3262 and Clause 1212.6.

On concrete surfaces care should be taken to ensure that the surface is completely dry, preferably for a few days before

application, to avoid blistering.

The Contractor will be responsible for light hand sweeping but, where the Overseeing Organisation agrees that

mechanical sweeping is necessary for the removal of extensive detritus or loose chippings, such additional work shall

be paid as an ancillary item in accordance with the Schedule of Rates

Drying/warming of the road surface prior to applying markings should be included in the Contractors' rates for work

between April and October inclusive, unless the Overseeing Organisation specifically requests marking to be carried

out to a short deadline and the surface needs drying.

Drying/warming will be paid for when the Overseeing Organisation requests it between the months of November and

March inclusive.

Every employee whilst on a public highway shall wear approved reflective or fluorescent clothing in accordance with

BSEN 471 1994.

The method of working shall conform with the Safety Code produced by the Road Safety Markings Association

(RMSA).

(i) ROAD TEXTURE

The work may be on surfaces of different textures and payment will be made for two classes as follows:

First application on sections of road which have been surface dressed during the current year with 10 mm or 14 mm

nominal size chippings.

All other surfaces.

(j) LAYING ON TOP OF EXISTING MARKINGS

Where a marking, but especially one which has a mandatory or prohibitory significance, is laid on top of or partially on

top of an existing marking, the Contractor shall be responsible to the Overseeing Organisation for ensuring that the

resulting combined marking complies with the current Traffic Signs Regulations and General Directions, and

subsequent amending regulations.

Page 193: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 213 THURROCK COUNCIL

(k) YELLOW MATERIAL

Yellow thermoplastic and paint materials shall comply with Colour No. 355 (Lemon) of BS 381C. The Overseeing

Organisation may specify Colour No. 310 (Primrose) or Colour No. 353 (Deep Cream) for which an additional rate is

included within the Schedules of Rates.

ROAD STUDS

(a) Reflecting road studs shall be installed where shown on the appropriate scheme layout drawing.

Shall be Stimsonite 953, white or coloured as directed bi-directional reflecting road studs as manufactured by

Simsco, Traffic Safety Products, The Stables, Clevedon Hall Estate, Victoria Road, Clevedon, Avon BS21

7SD. Tel 01275 341123.

Road studs shall be installed using “hotmelt adhesive” in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations and as described in the application instructions document no 29104A.

(a) Zebra Crossing Roadstuds

Road studs to be used at conventional pedestrian crossings (not pedestrian crossings on flat top road

humps) shall be square non-reflective studs with serrated face and chisel shank manufactured by

Reflecting Road Studs Ltd, Booth Town, Halifax, West Yorkshire HX3 6TR, Tel: 0422 360208.

(b) A real hole shall be formed in the road surface and the stud bedded and set therein to the correct

line and level in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and provisions of Chapter 5

of the Traffic Signs Manual.

Page 194: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 214 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 12/4: TRAFFIC SIGNS: CONES, CYLINDERS, FTDS AND OTHER TRAFFIC

DELINEATORS

1. All signs, cones, lamps etc. provided should be in srict conformity with the Traffic Signs Regulations & General

Directions 2002, Department of Transport Traffic Signs Manual 2006 Chapter 8, and any amendments or extensions

thereof prevalling at the date of Tender and must be undamaged and maintained in a clean condition.

The signs should be reflectorised by directly applied sheeting in accordance with Class 1 refectorisation (Table 1, BS

873: Part 6:).

2. Marking of Traffic Cones

2.1 Traffic Cones or cylinders shall comply with BS 873 Part 6 Category A designation 1 or 2 and shall be clearly and

durably marked with:-

a) the name, Trade Mark or other means of identification of the manufacturer or vendor;

b) the number and date of the British Standard;

c) the category of traffic cone; and

d) the designation of photometric performance.

3. Road Danger Lamps

The road danger lamps shall be battery operated and comply with BS 3143:Part 2 and Regulation 40 Traffic Signs

Regulations and General Directions 1981 and must be mounted on additional cones, except that the flashing rate for

flashing lamps shall be within the range 120-150 flashes per minute. The minimum luminous intensity of the lamps

shall be 0.5 candela for steady lamps, 1.0 candela for ripple lamps at their peak, and 1.5 candela for flashing lamps at

their peak.

The signs, cones and lamps etc. to be provided shall be those appropriate to the lane closures specified and more

appropriately described in Department of Transport Notice, Chapter 8 of the Traffic Signs Manual 2006 (Traffic Safety

Measures for Roadworks) and any amendments or extensions thereof prevalling at the date of tender.

High intensity hazard warning lamps shall be battery operated and mounted to comply with BS 3143: Part 4 and

Regulation 28 of the Traffic Signs Regulations and General Directions 2002 .

Page 195: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 215 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 12/5: TRAFFIC SIGNS: TRAFFIC SIGNALS

1. PERMANENT TRAFFIC SIGNALS

Traffic Signal installations will be identified by the Engineer

Thurrock Council’s annual traffic signals contractor "Peek traffic Signals”will install equipment

associated with the traffic signal system including signal heads, cables and controllers. Signal poles

will be provided by the Signal Contractor but foundations shall be constructed by the Main

Contractor as shown on the Thurrock Detail drawings.

The Main Contractor shall be responsible for the construction of all the necessary signal chambers

and traffic signal ducting as described in the appendices 5/1 & 5/2. The Main Contractor shall also

provide assistance where necessary during the removal/installation of the traffic signals. Traffic

Management shall be in accordance with Appendix 1/17.

2. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC SIGNALS SPECIFIED BY THE OVERSEEING ORGANISATION

Refer to Clause 117

(i) Locations:

(a) In accordance with Appendix 1/17

(ii) Equipment:

(a) Vehicular activated type signals must be provided; positions to be agreed by the Overseeing

Organisation. Prior approval shall be obtained in accordance with Appendix 1/17.

(b) Cable crossing protection shall be provided to all cables crossing the road.

(iii) Operation:

(a) Phasing/staging shall be agreed with the Overseeing Organisation.

(iv) Detection:

(a) Microwave vehicle detector (MVD) type.

(v) Testing:

(a) On site.

(vi) Special Requirements:

(a) The maximum length to be enclosed by traffic signals is 100 metres and there shall be a

minimum distance of 300 metres between any two sets of traffic signals.

(b) 24 hour operation in urban areas will, due to the noise necessitate a connection to the

electrical supply i.e. road lighting column, feeder pillar etc. The connection or connections

to be agreed with the Thurrock Council Street Lighting Engineer.

At the request of the Contractor arrangements can be made to install connectors at agreed

locations.

The power supply may be a portable generator in other areas .

Page 196: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 216 THURROCK COUNCIL

3. ZEBRA CROSSINGS

(i) Location:

The locations of Zebra crossings will be provided by the Overseeing Organisation

(iii) Belisha Beacons:

Pedestrian Beacon Posts shall as supplied by Signway Supplies (Datchet) Ltd,Signway

House, Kingsland Business Park, Stroudly Road, Basingstoke, Hampshire RG24 0UG. Tel

01256 811234. Beacons shall be galvanised and finished in Black with white 3M reflective

bands. Refer to Detail drawing SD99/12/009.

The beacon globe shall be a Yellow Vizibeacon as Manufactured by Triplex Engineering

Ltd, Upper Church Lane, Tipton, West Midlands DY4 9NZ. Tel 021 559 3446, Fax 021

522 2169.

The beacon globe gallery shall be an Anti Vandal Gallery as manufactured by

Endirect Lighting Services Ltd, Lenthay Road, Sherborne, Dorset, DT9 6AA. Tel 01935

815096. Fax 01935 816778.

(iii) Materials:

(a) The stripes on the crossing area shall be white thermoplastic screed with solid glass beads

applied uniformly on the surface at the rate of 400-500 g/m². A minimum skid resistance

level of 55 is required..

(b) The zig-zag lines and give way lines at the pedestrian crossing shall be reflectorised

white thermoplastic screed with solid glass beads applied uniformly on the surface

at the rate of 400-500 g/m².

Page 197: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 217 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 13/2: COLUMN AND BRACKET DATA SHEETS 1 AND 2

1. Sample column and bracket data sheets Performa blanks are annexed to this Appendix. They shall be completed as

required by Clause 1303 of the Specification and submitted in triplicate to the Engineer not later than 4 weeks prior to

start on site.

2. Instructions for completion of Bracket Data Sheets are contained in Appendix 13/3.

Page 198: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 218 THURROCK COUNCIL

ROAD LIGHTING COLUMN AND BRACKET DATA

SHEET 1 OF 2 -

NAME OF MANUFACTURER: DATA SHEET No.

Revision No.:

Date:

NAME OF CONTRACT:

PART A - GENERAL

Column nominal height

m

Column material

N/m2

Acceptable positions of bracket arms

relative to door position

Material design strength

mm

Door Opening

No. of door openings

Door opening size

- Height

mm

- Width

mm

Cross-section of base compartment

Height

(mm) Width

(mm) Depth

(mm)

Height of door above ground level

mm

Manufacturers drawing ref. number

ANY

Corrosion protection (steel columns

only)

- basic system type (NG 1901)

- additional sacrificial steel thickness, above

that need in the design, from the bottom of

the column to at least 250 mm above the

anticipated ground level

PART B - FOUNDATION DATA

PLANTED BASE Planting depth m

Standard Soil Type Factor G

630 390 230

Diameter of concrete surround (if any)

FLANGE BASE Bolt hole centres

(mm)

Hole Diameter

(mm)

Design load / bolt

(N)

Relevant forces and moments at Ground Level

Line of action of max. moment relating to door opening

NOTE: For flange plates with slotted holes a diagram shall be included with this data sheet

ROAD LIGHTING COLUMN AND BRACKET DATA

SHEET 2 OF 2

PART C - ACCEPTABLE LANTERNS

LANTERN: MAXIMUM CHARACTERISTICS

Standard k Factor 9 (see BS 5649)

1.50 1.80 2.20 2.50 3.00

Page 199: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 219 THURROCK COUNCIL

Post Top Column Lantern Max Wt kg Maximum windage area (m2 ) for standard K factor

Lantern Connection

Diameter Length

SINGLE ARM

BRACKET COLUMN Lantern lever arm (mm)

Due to weight of lantern Due to Windage on lantern

Bracket

Projection

(m)

Ref.

No.:

Drawing

No.

Material Lantern

Fixing

Angle

Lantern Connection Lantern

Maximum

Weight

(Kg)

Maximum windage area

(m²) for standard

k Factors Grade Design

Strength

(N/mm²)

Diameter

(mm)

Length

(mm)

DOUBLE ARM

BRACKET COLUMN Lantern lever arm (mm)

Due to weight of lantern Due to Windage on lantern

Bracket

Projection

(m)

Ref.

No.:

Drawing

No.

Material

Lantern

Fixing

Angle

Lantern Connection Lantern

Maximum

Weight

(Kg)

Maximum windage area

(m²) for standard

k Factors Grade Design

Strength

(N/mm²)

Diameter

(mm)

Length

(mm)

PART D CERTIFICATION

It is certified that the information given in the data sheet has been obtained in accordance with the requirements of EN40 as

implemented by Departmental Standard BD25/86 and the Specification.

Signed on Behalf of the Contractor…………………………………………..……………………………

Date:…………….of……………………………………..20XX

Page 200: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 220 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 13/3: INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLETION OF COLUMN AND BRACKET DATA SHEETS

1. General

a. When information is not required a dash shall be inserted in the appropriate boxes.

b. Where a Data Sheet is amended, it shall be given a new revision number with a date.

c. The revision number shall be consecutive letters of the alphabet, commencing with ‘A’.

d. The date of the revision shall agree with the date of the Manufacturer’s signature.

e. The column, or bracket material shall be steel, aluminium, reinforced or pressurised concrete, glass fibre

reinforced plastic or any other approved material, as permitted by or specified in Appendix 13/1.

f. The material design strength shall be the minimum specified in the design. Where more than one material is used

values for all materials shall be given.

g. All relevant entries shall be made on the Data Sheet before the document is certified by the Manufacturer.

2. Column Data

a. The column nominal height shall be selected using BS 5649 as appropriate.

b. The number of door openings shall agree with the manufacturer’s drawing.

c. The cross-section of the base compartment shall be indicated by a dimensioned diagram / sketch.

d. The acceptable positions of bracket arms relative to the door position shall be indicated on the diagram.

Where all positions are acceptable the box notes “ANY” shall be ticked.

e. Where concrete is necessary around the planted base in accordance with Clause 1305.3 and 1305.4 the minimum

diameter shall be entered.

f. The corrosion protection system used on the column when new shall be recorded. Where additional steel is

provided for sacrificial purposes the amount shall be recorded.

3. Bracket Data

a. The lantern lever arms, weight and maximum wind age area quoted shall be based on the most adverse loading

on the bracket when it is attached to any of the columns quoted in the compatible column sections.

b. (Notes: The lantern lever arms are the horizontal distances from the centre of gravity of the lantern and, if

applicable, the centroid of the wind age surface area to the end of the bracket joint).

Page 201: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 221 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 14/1: SITE RECORDS As built drawings shall be produced by the Contractor, on one film copy of the scheme drawing, and shall comply with the requirements of Clause 1402. The Contractor shall supply test certificates cross-referenced to the apparatus identified on the as-installed drawings. The Contractor shall also supply Operations and Maintenance manuals to support the site records.

Page 202: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 222 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 14/3: TEMPORARY LIGHTING 1. (i) The Contractor shall maintain on a previously lit Site, road lighting to a level

commensurate with that normally found on such a category of highway when lit. (ii) The existing lighting columns may be utilised in their original positions and/or extra lighting columns or portable lighting towers used. Any scheme or alteration to a scheme of temporary lighting shall be agreed with the Overseeing Organisation. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs involved other than energy payments for previously installed lighting columns.

2. (i) On a site not previously lit, any temporary lighting to illuminate the highway for safety reasons due to diversions etc, will be at the discretion of the Overseeing Organisation but at the cost of the Contractor. Lighting columns that will form part of the final lighting scheme may be used. Provided that they are only installed in their final position and not relocated or damaged, that due consideration is made for any lost lamp life and that energy consumed is paid for by the Contractor.

(ii) Requirements for any advanced fixed road lighting units, in final positions as far as practicable, to fulfil the requirements of (i).

(iii) Requirements to which the Contractor must adhere if he requires temporary lighting in the execution of the Works. Road Lighting standard to be not lower than normal.

Page 203: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 223 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 14/4 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR ROAD LIGHTING

The Contractor shall insert below details of the equipment which he proposes to use in the Works and shall submit

the information as soon as the Contract is awarded. Equipment shall comply with Series 1400 Clauses 1401 to 1425

and with this Appendix 14/4.

1 Luminaires and Lamps

The luminaire shall fully comply with the following requirements:

1. The LED and Gear Compartment shall be sealed to IP66 and contain features that enable the luminaire to breath.

2. The incoming mains supply shall automatically disconnect when changing any part of the LED array or control gear.

Compliance shall be subject to inspection by the Engineer.

3. The luminaire enclosure shall be entirely manufactured from die cast aluminium to LM6 / L 2520 or equivalent.

4. The upper part of the die cast aluminium luminaire body shall incorporate the LED array cooling fins. Slots, holes or

venturi channels shall not permit accumulation of leaf litter or debris.

5. Luminaire shall be ENEC approved in accordance with EN 60598-1; EN 60598-2-3; EN 50102 : 1995 including A1;

EN 62031 and EN 62471 by a recognised European body. The luminaire manufacturer shall hold a certification

agreement with the body for the manufacture of the products offered and the manufacturing location shall be subject to

auditing by the body in accordance with CENELEC Operational Document CIG 021.

6. The luminaire shall comply with the Exempt classification for photobiological safety at the maximum lumen output

possible to be delivered from the luminaire.

7. LED drivers shall be fully programmable on site to provide tuneable flux and enable either: integrated dimming,

analogue 1-10V or DALI control and shall be interchangeable with Philips Xitanium type Prog+ LED driver range.

Software shall be free to download.

8. The luminaire shall have a minimum life of 100kh, L80,F10

9. Luminaire shall be capable as a minimum of + and – 10 degree tilt when used in side entry mode.

10. Incoming electrical supply terminals shall be housed within a compartment sealed to IP66. The terminal block shall be

itself protected to at least IP23.

11. It shall be possible to check and adjust the tightness of column or bracket clamp fixing bolts without the need to open

the luminaire.

12. Luminaire efficacy shall exceed 100lm/W at all lumen outputs offered.

13. Light output shall be programmable and be configured for Constant Light Output.

14. The LED compartment shall be accessible without the use of tools.

15. The gear tray shall be removable with minimal use of tools.

16. The luminaires shall be capable of delivering a lumen pack ranging from 2,000 to a minimum of 36,000 lumens at

100,000 hrs L80, F10 life.

17. A range of at least two body sizes of luminaires shall be available from a single family with uniform appearance and

features.

18. A range of optics and lumen outputs shall be available covering M, P and C class applications to meet G2 as a

minimum as well as optics purposely designed for pedestrian crossing points for the single luminaire range offered.

19. The luminaire shall be compatible with third party equipment for CMS/Smart City operation utilising a NEMA socket.

20. NEMA sockets shall be of 7 pin design

Page 204: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 224 THURROCK COUNCIL

21. 1-10V or Dali control options shall be available.

22. Colour temperature shall be 4000K

23. CRI shall be maintained at 70 or above.

24. The LED array shall be protected to withstand IK08 impact test.

25. The optical system shall utilise PMMA or polycarbonate lenses.

26. The luminaire shall be fully compliant and marked in accordance with the CE marking directive. This shall include all

aspects of electrical safety, electromagnetic compatibility and photo-biological safety.

27. Side entry 34 to 42 mm shall be available up to 11klm as a minimum. Side entry 42 to 60mm shall be available above

this. Post top up to 76mm shall be available in all lumen packs and body sizes.

28. The luminaire design shall ensure in the event of failure of a single led or single driver (in a multiple driver system) or

single LED array or section of an array, the uniformity of light distribution from the luminaire is not affected.

29. The luminaire and mounting shall withstand shock and vibration testing to at least 50g laterally and vertically in all

possible mounting arrangements without damage to the luminaire, mountings or fixings. The luminaire shall remain

firmly clamped to the bracket arm or lighting column used in the test.

30. Luminaire finish shall be grey unless otherwise stated.

2. Photo-electric Control Units (PECUs)

2.1 The switching differential shall be 1:0.5.

2.2 On double bracket columns each lantern shall be separately controlled by its own PECU with a separated

circuit and sub-fuse to each lantern.

2.3 sign luminaire mounted on a column

In addition to the requirements of Clause 1409 photo-electric control units shall conform to the following

requirements.

a) PECUs shall provide Class 2 protection against electric shock and IP67 protection against ingress of

dust and moisture when fitted externally.

b) PECUs shall be designed to operate on a 230V 50Hz AC supply' with a

c) variation of +/- 10% from nominal voltage.

d) The photo sensor shall have zero drift from its calibrated light level over its guaranteed lifetime.

e) No thermal components shall be used within the control circuit

f) PECUs shall be calibrated to switch ON when daylight falls to a level of 20 lux, with a maximum switch

ON-OFF tolerance of +/- 10%.

g) PECUs shall have an average energy consumption of 0.1 watt or less, excluding dissipation in the

switching mechanism.

h) PECU shall have a guaranteed life of 6 years. within a temperature range –20 to +70 degrees centigrade.

3. Cut Outs, Fuse Holders, Fuses and Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBs)

3.1 Fuses in street lighting lanterns should be 6 Amps and BS 88 design. Fuses are required for a single lamp

Page 205: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 225 THURROCK COUNCIL

operating on a 230 V AC supply:

3.2 Where a cable serves several lighting columns, sign posts or illuminated bollards, which have their own

protective devices, the rating of the device protecting the network cable shall be the maximum value allowed

in accordance with BS7671. Discrimination between all circuit protective devices shall be maintained.

3.3 Cuts Outs, Fuse Holders, Fuses and Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBs) shall conform to the following

requirements:

a. Re-wireable fuses shall not be used, under any circumstances.

b. Cutouts and isolation units shall provide double pole isolation, they shall be fitted with an intermediate barrier to meet at least IP2X and the barrier shall only be removable with the use of a tool. The units shall be suitable for terminating incoming double insulated tails up to 6mm sq and with the use of extension boxes cables up to 35mm sq and 25 mm sq 4 core SWA supplies with capacity for looping in and out .

c. The terminals and contacts shall be fully shrouded, only accessible by use of a tool, and shall have a rating not less than 25 amps and be suitable for fuses complying with BS88.

d. In columns where an outgoing spur cable is to feed illuminated traffic signs, bollards, or other columns a double pole fused isolator shall be installed, one to fuse the light unit in the column, the other fuse to protect to protect the outgoing spur cables.

e. All sub-fuses, switch-fuses and switches shall be labeled with permanent plastic labels to Identify the equipment that they feed and the fuse testing, and shall be phase identified with a colour coded plastic label.

7 Ancillary Equipment

7.1 The positioning of equipment described in Clauses 1411 to 1416 within the base compartment of

columns shall conform to the requirements of the Standard Drawings.

7.2 All wiring and installation of components within Lighting Units shall conform to the requirements of

the Standard Drawings.

8 Feeder Pillars

8.1 Feeder pillars shall be suitable for the layouts shown on the Standard Drawings and

shall conform with the following:

a) Be constructed of galvanised sheet steel as stated' on the Works Order

b) A circuit schematic diagram label showing the outgoing circuits shall be mounted on the inside

of the pillar door. The label 'to be manufactured from rigid plastic, pre-printed and adhesive

mounted. Lettering to be 3.5 mm high in black on a white backboard. All switches and switch fuses

shall be labeled with engraved plastic labels to identify which item of equipment they supply

and the fuse rating.

c) A clear plastic holder shall be fitted onto the inside of the door of each feeder pillar. An 'as

constructed' drawing identifying all the equipment that the feed~ pillar supplies shall be placed in

this holder.

b) Earth electrodes shall be provided at each Feeder Pillar and at the last item of highway electrical

equipment on each circuit. The maximum acceptable value of earth electrode resistance shall be 60

Ohms.

8.2 Feeder Pillars shall conform to the following requirements:

Page 206: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 226 THURROCK COUNCIL

a) Sufficient space shall be allowed in the pillar for the installation of the Distribution Network

Operator (DNO) supply equipment.

b) Feeder pillars shall be identified by a white plastic plaque with 40mm high black letters. The plaque

must be fixed to the top half of the pillar door with adhesive. Feeder Pillars shall be identified in

accordance with the schedule provided by the Engine~ upon request

c) Door locks shall be of the anti-vandal type (hex key with central pip) or the standard Lucy' type.

d) The manufacturer and the catalogue number shall be provided to the Engineer for each feeder pillar.

9 Earthing

9.1 Earthing and Bonding shall conform with the following requirements:

a) Where an Employer owned cable system is used the cable armour or earth shall be terminated using

a Central Earthing Terminal to which all other earthing shall be bonded.

b) Chambers for earth electrodes shall be used in accordance with standard Drawings. A label shall be

fitted in all base compartments detailing feed points.

c) The electrical installation shall be in strict compliance with BS7671 and GP03

d) Code of Practice 'for Electrical Safety in Highway Electrical Operations, published by the

Institution of Lighting Professionals.

10 Cables and Cable Joints

10.1 Cable trenches shall be excavated to the lines shown in the Works Order and comply

with the requirements of the task order.

10.2 Cable covers shall not be used unless otherwise stated on the Works Order

10.3 No additional support is required unless otherwise stated on the Works Order.

10.4 All Cables shall be laid in 100mm diameter orange coloured duct with a minimum wall thickness of 2.0mm in

accordance with Standard Drawings, unless stated otherwise on the Works Order.

10.5 Cable joint marker blocks shall not be used.

10.6 Cables and Cable Joints shall conform to the following requirements:

a) Single phase circuits shall be fed with 3 core cables and the exposed cores shall be identified as

follows Brown : Phase, Blue : Neutral and Green Yellow : CPC. Three phase circuits shall be fed

with "5 core cable with colour coded cores for Phases (Brown Grey Black), Neutral (Blue) and CPC

(Green Yellow)

b) All cabling shall be permanently marked, identifying the supply/feed location/equipment, using a

permanent label attached to the cable' near the point of termination.

Page 207: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 227 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 14/5 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR TRAFFIC SIGNS

Equipment shall comply with Series 1400 Clauses 1401 to 1425 and with this Appendix 14/5.

1. The positioning of equipment described in Clauses 1411 to 1416 within the base compartment of traffic signs shall conform to the requirements of the Standard Drawings

2. All wiring and installation of components within traffic signs shall conform to the requirements of the Standard Drawings.

3. Illumination and electrical work on or to gantries shall be as specified on the Works Order.

4. Electrical requirements for traffic signs shall comply with the following:

b) Galvanised conduit shall be used between the stub post and the main post where

fitted.

c) Flexible conduit shall be used between the bracket mounting and the luminaire body where necessary.

d) Luminaires shall be of a type designed for traffic sign lighting and shall be suitable

for the brackets offered in Appendix 12/1

e) Luminaires shall have a minimum ingress protection rating ofIP54.

f) Lamps shall be LED.

g) The electrical installation shall be in strict compliance with BS7671 and GP03 Code of Practice for Electrical Safety in Highway Electrical Operations, Fifth Edition, published by the Institution of Lighting Engineers

Page 208: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 228 THURROCK COUNCIL

1700 Series Structural Concrete Numbered Appendices APPENDIX 17/1 - GENERAL APPENDIX 17/2 – PORE-LINING IMPREGNATION APPENDIX 17/1 - GENERAL 1. The requirements for any structural concrete necessary for the works, including strength,

aggregate size, etc shall be as stated in sub-Clause 1701.1 and the instructing Task Order. 2. The requirements for cement shall be as stated in sub-Clause 1702.1, unless otherwise stated

in the instructing Task Order. 3. The requirements for lightweight aggregates shall be as stated in sub-Clause 1702.2, unless

otherwise stated in the instructing Task Order. 4. All admixtures shall comply with the requirements of sub-Clause 1702.3, unless otherwise

stated in the instructing Task Order. 5. Routine identity testing for compressive strength, slump, flow and air content of concrete

batches shall only be undertaken upon the issue of a written instruction by the Employer. Such instructions will only be issued where there is a specific doubt over the quality of the concrete in question.

6. Details of any requirements for construction joints shall be as stated in the instructing Task

Order. 7. Retarding agents shall not be used, except upon the prior written instruction of the Employer. 8. Details of any requirements for any permanent formwork shall be as stated in the instructing

Task Order. 9. Details of any requirements for lifting and supporting any precast concrete members shall be

as stated in the instructing Task Order. The Contractor shall ensure that all requirements for the lifting and supporting of precast members are properly addressed in the Construction Phase Health and Safety Plan.

10. Details of any requirements for the assembly and erection of any precast concrete members

shall be as stated in the instructing Task Order. The Contractor shall ensure that all requirements for the assembly and erection of precast members are included in his Construction Phase Health and Safety Plan for the Work Task.

11. Details of any requirements for reinforcing bars shall be as stated in the instructing Task

Order.

Page 209: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 229 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 17/2 – PORE-LINING IMPREGNATION 1. Application and selection of pore-lining impregnants shall satisfy the requirements of

Standard BD 43/03 – The Impregnation of Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete Highway Structures Using Hydrophobic Pore-Lining Impregnants.

2. Details and areas to receive impregnation will be shown on project-specific design drawings

and described in Appendix 17/2 in the Project-Specific Service Information.

Page 210: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 230 THURROCK COUNCIL

Series 2000 Waterproofing for Concrete Structures Numbered Appendices APPENDIX 20/1 – Waterproofing for Concrete Structures General 1. New waterproofing systems permitted for use on highway structures shall generally be a

proprietary seamless liquid applied membrane syatem for concrete bridge deck waterproofing complying with Series 2000 and satisfying the requirements of DfT Standard BD47 “Waterproofing and Surfacing of Concrete Bridge Decks”.

2. Prior to the Employer approving the proposed system, the Contractor shall supply to the

Employer the technical information on the product from the manufacturer. The product shall have BBA certification.

3. Additional requirements for the repair and replacement of existing bridge deck waterproofing shall be as described in Clause 2008SR.

4. Additional requirements for non-destructive testing of waterproofing membranes shall be as described in sub-Clauses 11 to 19 below.

5. Waterproofing shall only be applied when the ambient temperature is 4oC and rising or above 4oC. The Contractor shall allow in his prices for the cost of providing a temporary enclosure system to ensure the application of waterproofing membrane is not affected by inclement weather.

Protection Layers to Waterproofing 6. Unless otherwise specified, all non-vertical areas treated with a spray applied

waterproofing system are to receive a 20mm thick red tinted sand asphalt protection layer as described in Clause 2003, except that compliance shall be with BS 3690 : Part 1 and BS 594 : Part 1 recipe type F wearing course mixture designation 0/3 with 5% of filler content inorganic red oxide. Marshall stability shall be 5.5kN +/- 2kN. Liquid spray membranes shall have a suitable tack coat applied prior to the laying of the additional protective layer so that a good bond is achieved between the additional protective layer and the waterproofing membrane.

7. Unless otherwise specified, all vertical areas treated with spray applied waterproofing system shall receive a 15 – 20mm thick bituminised compressible board protection layer.

8. The protective layer shall be applied immediately above bridge deck waterproofing to those areas shown on scheme drawings in accordance with sub-Clauses 2005.4 and 2005.5.

9. The permission of the Employer shall be obtained before plant, equipment or traffic is permitted onto the waterproofing system.

10. Where it is necessary for plant, equipment or traffic to stand or travel on the waterproofing system, suitable temporary protection shall be provided to the satisfaction of the Employer.

Testing Requirements for Spray Applied Waterproofing Systems 11. Following deck preparation and before application of the primer, tests shall be carried out

in accordance with BS EN 4626:2003, on random areas agreed with the Designer, to

Page 211: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 231 THURROCK COUNCIL

assess the adhesive strength of the cured primer and membrane to the deck. A minimum of 2 pull off tests shall be carried out on the waterproofing system per structure per visit.

12. The Contractor shall provide with each batch of material delivered to the site, a certificate

showing that the material complies with the details given on the PWS data sheet.

13. Two samples of size at least 20mm x 200mm x 2mm minimum thickness from material sprayed on to open moulds shall be provided and tested or tensile strength and elongation at break to BS 903 Part A2, and tear strength to BS 903 Part A3 method C. The Contractor shall supply the Employer with copies of the test results.

14. The coverage rate of material used shall be monitored continuously and the Employer shall be provided with daily sheets showing the weight of material used and the area covered for each period of spray operation.

15. The wet film thickness shall be monitored continuously using a comb type thickness gauge or pin gauge, and the Employer shall be provided with daily sheets showing the wet film thicknesses measured and their location. Where directed by the Employer, pieces of the fully cured membrane of size not less than 50mm x 50mm shall be cut out, to establish the dry film thickness and given to the Employer labelled with their location of origin.

16. The adhesion of the fully cured membrane to the deck shall be measured by two tests for each 100m2 of finished membrane or part thereof, or one test per spraying session if the sprayed area during the session is less than 50m2, at locations chosen by the Employer. Tests shall be carried out by a method accepted by the Employer and the apparatus used shall have a current certificate of calibration. The Employer shall be provided with the test results labelled with the location of the test site. Test values falling below 1.0N/mm2 shall require spraying operations to be suspended while further investigation is undertaken. Areas deemed not to meet this figure shall be removed and re-sprayed to the satisfaction of the Employer at the Contractor’s cost.

17. The finished membrane shall be tested by the Contractor for pin holes and discontinuities

and any imperfections detected shall be rectified by over-coating the membrane with brush or spray applied material compatible with the membrane for a distance of 50mm on all sides of the defect to the satisfaction of the Employer by the Contractor at his own expense.

18. Testing shall be carried out using a high voltage direct current detector. In addition to the manufacturer's instructions for use, the following requirements and conditions shall apply: (i) The instrument is to be operated above 13.5kv. (ii) The earth lead is not to be more than 10m long. (iii) Movement/expansion joints shall not be crossed when testing. (iv) Earthing with screws set into substrate or exposed reinforcement shall be used. (v) When a leakage path has been found its position is to be marked with a permanent marker pen on the membrane. (vi) The instrument is not to be used on wet or damp surfaces. (vii) The equipment is to have a current certificate of compliance / calibration.

19. All areas of membrane destroyed by testing shall be made good by a method accepted by the Employer.

Page 212: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 232 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 23/1 – BRIDGE DECK EXPANSION JOINTS General

1. All bridge deck expansion joints shall satisfy the requirements of Standard BD33, 'Expansion Joints for Use in Highway Bridge Decks'.

2. Design of new bridge deck joint systems shall be in accordance with guidance in the Published Document - Background to the National Annex to BS EN 1991-2, Traffic Loads on Bridges.

3. Selection of the particular mechanical joint type is to be based on the known or calculated recoverable and non-recoverable movements or in accordance with the manufacturer’s specification and recommendations.

4. Selection of a joint type shall satisfy the requirements of Standards BD33 and BA 26 and shall take into reasonable account the “whole life costing” of a joint system and the necessity of regular or long-term maintenance.

5. Unless otherwise specified, any joint system shall be continuous across the full width of the deck and taken through the kerb and verge to terminate at the front edge of the parapet or into the parapet wall.

Selection and Installation:

6. Installation shall be conducted by an approved contractor or directly under the supervision of the Supplier of the joint type and in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations.

7. During installation, the existing air gap of the structure must be kept clear of any debris arising as a result of the preparation or construction of the gap. The Contractor shall ensure that a continuous uninterrupted separation in the structure below the bridge joint is maintained throughout the joint installation operations.

8. Specific requirements for the protection of newly installed joints shall be shown on the drawings, where appropriate.

9. Joint systems shall only be applied to sound concrete. Minor spalls or damage on bridge decks or to the top of abutment walls may be repaired with the resin beds or encapsulation resins of the selected joint in accordance with the joint manufacturers advice.

10. Concrete affected by cracking or deterioration shall be repaired or replaced with proprietary repair material with minimum Grade 30. Repair materials shall be fully cured in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Any additives included shall not be incompatible with the selected joint system or affect the bond of resins, adhesives or other fixing materials used for the installation of any new joint system. All surfaces to receive joint systems shall be prepared in accordance with the expansion joint manufacturer’s advice.

11. Separate areas of concrete repairs must be marked out and agreed with the Employer in advance and rectified structurally in accordance with a method of working which is agreed with the Employer. All separate repairs shall be undertaken following the principles outlined in The Concrete Society Technical Report No 26.

Requirements for subsurface drainage:

Page 213: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 233 THURROCK COUNCIL

12. Unless otherwise specified, all joints shall incorporate their own sub-surface and below joint drainage system, designed provided and installed to the manufacturer’s recommendations, that collects pore pressure and or surface water drainage away form the joint and discharges water to the bridge deck drainage system. The drainage shall discharge into the general drainage of the structure or to a point which will not present a hazard or contamination to any part of the structure.

13. Design and installation of expansion joint drainage and their waterproofing shall also follow where practicable the guidance and recommendations in the TRL application guide 33 “Water management for durable bridges”, by S Pearson and JR Cuningham.

14. Requirements for subsurface drainage for joints shall be shown on scheme specific drawings.

15. Consideration shall be given for including sleeves to all ducts and drainage units through or under joints. All such sleeves shall be adequately sealed to prevent resin migration in to the joint air gap. Where ducts are placed into a purpose built channel or trough, provision shall be made in the design to support the selected mechanical joint in this area. Locations, details and site specific requirements for sleeving and additional support shall be shown on scheme specific drawings.

Requirements for Cover Plates:

16. Cover plates shall be provided to cover rebates in joints within footways and or at all carriageway kerb transitions.

17. Unless otherwise specified, cover plates shall be either galvanised steel or aluminium plates of appropriate thickness to suit joint width and traffic loadings to satisfy the accidental wheel loading requirements and to protect kerbs subject to wheel attrition on tight radius curves or to cover skewed kerbs where a simpler fabrication is required.

18. Cover plate holding down bolts and fixings shall be of stainless steel, complete with rubber isolation washers and neoprene sheeting, where required, for water-tightness in accordance with the joint manufacturer’s recommendations.

Joint Types

19. The following proprietary bridge expansion joints currently exist on the Network:

Maurer D Series Thorma Joint Britflex BEJ Rubba Pak Prismo Ceva Felspan Radaflex Zebra Joint Bridgemaster Fabreeka Mageba Transflex Reinstahl Macspansion DEMAG Rolling leaf movement joint

20. New expansion joint types for use in this contract are as scheduled below. Type references are as described in Table 1 of BD33. The minimum range is given to indicate when the type of joint may not be economical.

Joint Type (as in Table

Joint Description

Total acceptable longitudinal movement

Max acceptable vertical movement between sides

Nosing Size Joint Width

Page 214: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 234 THURROCK COUNCIL

1 of BD33)

of joint

Min (mm)

Max (mm)

mm Max Width (mm)

Max Depth (mm)

mm

1 Buried joint under continuous surfacing

5 20 1.3 n/a n/a n/a

1 Buried joint under continuous surfacing with elastomeric pad or buried galvanised steel plates

5 20(1) 1.3 n/a n/a n/a

2 Asphaltic plug joint in carriageway

5 40 3.0 n/a n/a 500

2 Asphaltic plug joint in carriageway

5 40 3.0 n/a n/a 500 – 1000

2 Asphaltic plug joint in verge or footway

5 40 3.0 n/a n/a 500

2 Asphaltic plug joint in verge or footway

5 40 3.0 n/a n/a 500 – 1000

3 Nosing joint with poured sealant

5 12 3.0 200 150 n/a

4 Nosing joint with preformed compression seal

5 40 3.0 200 150 n/a

5 REJ Reinforced elastomeric joint without bonded metal plates in carriageway

5 45(1) 3.0 n/a n/a n/a

Page 215: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 235 THURROCK COUNCIL

5 REJ Reinforced elastomeric joint with bonded metal plates in carriageway

10 350(1) 3.0 n/a n/a n/a

5 REJ Reinforced elastomeric joint without bonded plates in verge or footway

5 45(1) 3.0 n/a n/a n/a

5 REJ Reinforced elastomeric joint with bonded metal plates in verge or footway

10 350(1) 3.0 n/a n/a n/a

6 EMR

(CI)

Elastomeric joint in metal runners cast into deck – single element joint

5 80(1) 3.0 150 150 n/a

6 EMR (CI)

Elastomeric joint in metal runners cast into deck – multi-element joint

15 100(1) 3.0 150 150 n/a

6 EMR (RE)

Elastomeric joint in metal runners – resin encapsulated or bolted on

55 150(1) 3.0 150 150 n/a

7 CT Cantilever comb or tooth joint - proprietary

25 440(1) 3.0 n/a n/a n/a

T CT Cantilever comb or tooth joint – purpose made

25 1000(1) 3.0 n/a n/a n/a

Page 216: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 236 THURROCK COUNCIL

(1) The maximum range varies according to manufacturer or type. Testing of Bridge Deck Expansion Joints 21. The Contractor shall provide with all batches of materials delivered to site the Certificate of

Compliance in accordance with BD33 and BA26 “Expansion Joints for Use in Highway Bridge Decks”.

22. Additional requirements for testing asphaltic plug joints are set out in Clause 2306AR.

Page 217: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 237 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 23/2 - SEALING OF GAPS (OTHER THAN IN BRIDGE DECK EXPANSION JOINTS)

1. This Appendix applies to the sealing of vertical, horizontal and inclined gaps formed as

movement or other joints excluding bridge deck expansion joints.

2. Joints shall be sealed with a proprietary two part polysulphide sealant to BS4254:1983. The joint shall be prepared and the sealant shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

3. Generally, the joint surfaces shall be dry, clean and frost free. Oil and grease shall be cleaned from the surface. The joint shall be cleaned of all of the old sealant. Any joint filler material should be checked to ensure it remains tightly packed and serviceable to the full length of the joint. If the existing filler material is not serviceable, the filler shall be raked out to a depth that allows suitable backer/filler strip to be installed.

4. The finished sealant joint shall be smooth and continuous with a uniform slightly bevelled convex surface over the full length of the joint. Unless otherwise instructed, the sealant shall be slightly recessed from the face edges of the joint. Any masking tape used shall be removed along with any accidental overspill or smearing of the sealant material to leave a clean, neatly finished appearance.

5. Details of joint fillers and sealants shall be specified in individual Task Orders, but shall utilise the following:

Joint Filler 1 Semi-rigid closed cell, cross linked, polyethylene foam. Joint Filler 2 Cellular performed low density filler. Joint Filler 3 Expanded polystyrene foam. Sealant 1 Grey – 2 part polysulphide liquid polymer to BS 4254 or polyurethane

elastomeric sealant of equivalent performance. Sealant 2 Hot poured rubber bitumen. Sealant 3 Bitumen based sealing compound vertical grade.

Page 218: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 238 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 24/1: BRICKWORK, BLOCKWORK AND STONEWORK 1. Locations where sulfate-resisting Portland cement is to be used will be stated on the Task

Order. 2. Mortar designations for brickwork, blockwork and stonework shall be (i) or (ii) as

appropriate. 3. Particular requirements for clay bricks to BS 3921 will be stated on the Works Order. 4. Requirements for bricks for chambers shall comply with the requirements of sub-Clause

2406.4. 5. Particular requirements for concrete blocks to BS 6073 will be stated on the Works Order. 6. Any particular requirements such as colour, special mixes, texture and casting in stainless

steel ties for reconstructed stone will be stated on the Works Order. 7. Type of bonding and jointing and pointing for brickwork and blockwork will be stated on

the Works Order.

Page 219: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 239 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 26/1: ANCILLARY CONCRETE

MIX REFERENCE

All

Ancillary

Concrete

Mixes

Ordinary (O)

Class of Concrete (Grade/Max. Agg. Size)

Minimum Cement Content (kg/m3)

Maximum Free Water/Cement Ratio

Required Workability

Revised Max. Cement Content (kg/m3)

Required Type of Cement

Required Source/Special Type of Aggregate

Required Admixture

Air Entrainment Required (YES/NO)

Min. or Max. Temp. of Fresh Concrete deg C

Rate of Sampling and Testing

Other Requirements

Class of Precautions to BS 5328 : Part 1 : 1991 Table

7 for concrete exposed to sulphate attack

Yes

Page 220: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 240 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 27 AR/1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE OF LIGHTING UNITS AND FEEDER PILLARS 1. General

1.1 The routine maintenance of Lighting Units and feeder pillars shall comply with the requirements of this Appendix 27 AR/1.

1.2 The Contractor shall ensure that doors and canopies are left secure on completion of the

work including the removal and replacement of banding for damaged doors where required.

2. Cleaning and Inspection 2.1 Cleaning and Inspection shall include carrying out the cleaning, inspection and

minor corrective works of Lighting Units and feeder pillars including

a) A thorough cleaning of luminaire external and internal surfaces, photo-electric control units and any other components affecting the optical performance of the luminaire. Optical compartments with an ingress protection of IP65 or greater shall not be cleaned unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.

b) A thorough cleaning of all electrical compartments and components in Lighting

Units and feeder pillars

c) Checking the security of electrical and earthing connections followed by the application of de-moisturising spray to all electrical components

d) The degreasing, lubrication and operation of all toggles, wing nuts, hinges, door

locks, raising and lowering gear and any other mechanical moving part f) The removal of debris and undergrowth from 300mm radius of the column sign or

feeder pillar base or foundation

g) Cleaning of any exposed column flange.

h) Repair of grouting

i) The raising and lowering of folding columns, confirming correct operation, including the supply of any specialist equipment required to perform this operation.

j) Cleaning of all numbering and warning labels and replacement of illegible

numbering.

k) Removing any fly posting and stickers

l) Checking the security and repair of sign face fixings and re-setting misaligned faces.

m) Checking any conduit for security and corrosion and reporting faults found to the

Engineer

n) Checking the correct operation of Lighting Units and repairing or replacing photo-electric cell units, lamps, ballasts, ignitors, capacitors and internal wiring where necessary.

o) Cleaning the internal and external surfaces of internally illuminated signs and

Page 221: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 241 THURROCK COUNCIL

bollards. '

p) Pruning or trimming and disposing any branches or foliage up to a maximum cross-sectional diameter of 25mm, located within the highway boundary, which impair the optical performance of the luminaire onto the road surface, or obscure an illuminated sign to a road user (plants and trees located on private land, or are greater than 25mm in cross-sectional diameter shall be identified by the Contractor to the Engineer where they impair lighting optical performance).

q) Remove and return to store unauthorised attachments to Lighting Units for

collection or until such times as the Engineer approves disposal. 2.2 The following shall be carried out at the time of dean and inspection and on any

intermediate visit to a Lighting Unit or feeder pillar:

a) Ensure the bracket, luminaire and luminaire optical equipment is correctly aligned with respect to the carriageway, footway, or sign face

b) Re-erect displaced baselit bollard shells and leave in lighting

c) Check all grub screws and locking devices are tightened in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.

d) Report any damage, corrosion, misalignment, or absence of columns, or posts, to the Engineer.

e) Undertake a visual condition assessment and simple structural test, such as

hammer testing, of columns, posts, brackets and feeder pillars and report to the Engineer. .

f) Undertake a visual condition assessment of luminaires and electrical components

for corrosion, degradation of material, or evidence of overheating, fracture, condensation of tracking and report to the Engineer.

g) Confirm the accuracy of information held in the Engineer's asset management system and report any discrepancies to the Engineer. 3. Cleaning Methods and Materials for Lighting Units and parts of Lighting Units 3.1 The cleaning of all Lighting Units and feeder pillars shall be carried out using an antistatic

water based alkaline cleaner/degreaser and cloths complying with the following requirements:

a. The cleaning solution shall be non-toxic and cause no handling dangers to personnel.

The proposed detergent shall be approved by the Engineer.

b. T4e cleaning solution shall cause no harmful effects to the range of materials and surfaces to be cleaned.

b. The cleaning solution shall be highly effective against greasy surface deposits, fast acting and suitable for use in cold water, in hard or soft water areas.

c. The cleaning solution shall not give rise to smearing and it shall not be necessary to carry out rinsing with clean cold water after cleaning.

d. The cleaning solution shall not cause persistent foaming in use and shall not promote the formation of static charges on the equipment surfaces.

e. The cleaner/degreaser solution shall be diluted with clean uncontaminated water in

Page 222: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 242 THURROCK COUNCIL

accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and shall be applied by means of soft muslin cloths.

3.2 The cleaning cloths shall be continually cleaned or changed to ensure that no scouring or

abrasive action damages the surfaces of the .optical components. The cloths shall not be 'wrung out' or cleaned on the working platform of the lift vehicle and quantities of the cleaning solution in open containers shall not be carried in the working platform of the lift vehicle.

3.3 The attention of the Contractor is drawn to the dangers which may arise from the dropping of quantities of water or solution onto vehicles or other highway users passing below or adjacent to the cleaning vehicle. All cleaning cloths to be used shall be dipped in the cleaning solution and wrung out in containers on the vehicle chassis before cleaning commences.

3.4 After the use of the cleaning solution, all surfaces treated shall be wiped with a clean dry

cloth and left reasonably dry. 4. Electrical Testing. 4.1 Electrical Testing, excluding the cable sheath insulation test detailed in Sub-Clause

1424,2(a), of Lighting Unit internal wiring and network cabling owned by the Employer' shall be undertaken every six years, or as otherwise instructed by the Engineer. The testing shall be carried in accordance with Clause 1424 and shall comply with the requirements of appendix 1/5

Page 223: PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION - Thurrock · PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION 1. (08/93) ... Series/Appendix Page Number Publication Date 000 1 to 3 May 2014 000 4 to 7F February 2016

SPEC PAGE 243 THURROCK COUNCIL

APPENDIX 30/5: GRASS SEEDING, WILDFLOWER SEEDING AND TURFING 1. Seed mixture(s) to be sown shall be as stated in the following table.

Grass Seed and Mixture per 50 Kg Kg %

Brown Top Bentgrass (Agrostis Tenius) 5 10

Dwarf Creeping Red Fescue (Festuca Rubra SSP Litoralis)

7.5 15

Dwarf Creeping Red Fescue (Festuca Rubra SSP Trichophylla)

7.5 15

Creeping Red Fescue (Festuca Rubra SSP Rubra)

12.5 25

Hard Fescue (Festuca Longifolia) 10 20

Smooth Stalked Meadowgrass (Poa Pratensis)

7.5 15

One of the following cultivars/types shall be included in this mixture: Highland Boreal, Danish Rubina/Danish Hard Fescue/Creeping Red Fescue, Erte/Danish

2. Sowing rates for side slopes and other areas shall be in accordance with Clause 3005.8. 3. Where stated on the Task Order turf arising on Site shall be re-used in accordance with

Clause 3005.13. 4. Imported turf shall only be used where stated on the Task Order.